JP2018061584A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement.SOLUTION: In a game area PE, a lower operation port 305 into which a game ball can enter, an upper operation port 303 into which a game ball can enter, and an electric accessory 307 are provided. The electric accessory 307 can shift between an open state in which a game ball can be received in the upper operation port 303 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received in the upper operation port 303. The electric accessory 307 is configured such that a game ball can flow down in front of the electric accessory 307 when it is in the closed state. In a front face of an open/close member in the electric accessory 307, a guide part which defines a flow-down direction of a game ball as the downward.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the entrance part into which a game ball can enter, the first state in which the game ball can be received or received easily in the entrance part, and the game ball cannot be received or received in the entrance part. There is known a variable receiving means that can switch to a difficult second state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, there is still room for improvement in improving interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

The present invention
Launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A pitching portion provided in the gaming area and allowing a gaming ball to enter;
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. Variable receiving means that can be switched,
Variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state,
There is provided a defining means capable of defining a flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state.

  According to the present invention, interest can be improved.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. Front view of the winning unit. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. AA line sectional view of Drawing 5. (A) is a front view for demonstrating the flowing-down situation of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, (b) is a front view for explaining the flowing-down situation of the game sphere in the open state of the electric accessory. (A) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the flow-down condition of the game ball in the closed state of an electrically-powered object, (b) is sectional drawing for demonstrating the flow-down condition of the game ball in the open state of an electric-powered object. The front view which shows a light emission board | substrate. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a classification table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an open | release classification table and a normal figure open | release pattern. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows the normal process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows a common figure game time control process. The flowchart which shows a common figure change start process. The flowchart which shows a general game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows an accessory opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing various productions. The block diagram for demonstrating the storage area for suspension. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the process for a special figure change start. The flowchart which shows the common figure change display control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a common figure game time, (b) The flowchart which shows the process for a common figure fluctuation start. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special light emission effect. The flowchart which shows the process during usual figure change. The flowchart which shows the process for support states in MPU of an effect control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special display effect. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game. The front view which shows the winning unit of 2nd Embodiment. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. The BB sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing corresponding to the closed state of an electric accessory, (b) is sectional drawing corresponding to the open state of an electric accessory. (A) is a front view for demonstrating the flowing-down situation of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, (b) is a front view for explaining the flowing-down situation of the game sphere in the open state of the electric accessory. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the 2nd guide part in the modification of 2nd Embodiment, and sectional drawing equivalent to the CC line cross section of FIG. The front view which shows the winning unit of 3rd Embodiment. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. 48 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing corresponding to the closed state of an electric accessory, (b) is sectional drawing corresponding to the open state of an electric accessory. The front view which shows the winning unit of 4th Embodiment. The perspective view which looked at the winning unit from diagonally forward. The EE sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing corresponding to the closed state of an electric accessory, (b) is sectional drawing corresponding to the open state of an electric accessory. (A) is a front view for demonstrating the flowing-down situation of the game ball in the closed state of the electric accessory, (b) is a front view for explaining the flowing-down situation of the game sphere in the open state of the electric accessory. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the common figure open | release pattern of 5th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the usual game state transfer process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows an accessory opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special display effect of 6th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a general map open | release pattern, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a general map open | release pattern and special display effects. The flowchart which shows the process in support state in MPU of an effect control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a process during a waiting period. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a winning unit 301, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display 43, an accessory display 44, and the like. The winning unit 301 is provided with an upper operating port 303 and a lower operating port 305. In the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the upper operating port 303 than to win the lower operating port 305.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 305, this is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower operation port 305, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper operation port 303. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the upper working port 303 with respect to the lower working port 305, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the upper working port 303 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the lower working port 305. On the contrary, from the viewpoint of only increasing the advantage of the support state described later, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower operation port 305 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper operation port 303. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to the operating ports 303 and 305, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 to be larger than the payout number related to the operating ports 303 and 305.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 303, the lower operation port 305 or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area than the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below the upper area PE1. The left region PE2 that is the left region, the right region PE3 that is continuous to the lower side of the upper region PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, the left region PE2, and the right region PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PE4 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 36.

  When the player operates the firing handle 54 with a first range of rotation amount that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball flows down to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. Start out. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1, the left area PE2, and the lower area PE4. On the other hand, when the player operates the launch handle 54 with a second range of turn amount that is equal to or greater than the reference turn amount as the second launch operation, the game is performed to the right of the lateral region in the upper region PE1. The ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1, the right area PE3, and the lower area PE4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2 of the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the launch handle 54, and the right area PE3. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

  The upper working port 303 and the lower working port 305 are arranged in the vertical direction with the upper working port 303 facing upward. The upper working port 303 is opened forward, and the lower working port 305 is opened upward. A game ball can reach the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 regardless of whether the player is performing the first launching operation or the second launching operation. The upper working port 303 is provided with an electric accessory 307 that opens and closes the upper working port 303. The electric accessory 307 includes a closed state (non-accepted state, non-supported state or non-guide state) in which a game ball cannot be won in the upper operating port 303, and an open state (accepted state) in which the game ball can win a prize rather than the closed state. (Support state or guide state). The upper operating port 303, the electric accessory 307, and the lower operating port 305 are mounted on the winning unit 301, are integrated into one unit as an operating port device, and are installed in the lower region PE 4 of the game board 24. Details of the winning unit 301 will be described later.

  The variable winning device 32 is installed in the lower area PE4 in the game board 24. That is, the game ball can reach the variable winning device 32 regardless of whether the player is performing the first launch operation or the second launch operation. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win or a special off-winning win is made. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  Two through gates 35 are provided in the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 of the game board 24 with the variable display unit 36 interposed therebetween. That is, when the player is performing the first launch operation, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the left region PE2, and the player performs the second launch operation. If it is, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the right region PE3. Both through gates 35 are configured such that game balls can pass through, and the game balls won in the through gate 35 in the game area PE are discharged to the game area PE as they are. The game ball that has won (passed) the through gate 35 then flows down to the lower region PE4. That is, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the upper working port 303, the lower working port 305, and the variable winning device 32. When a winning to the through gate 35 occurs, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the front surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the above-described general winning opening 31 is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  In the main display section 43, when the variable winning device 32 enters the opening / closing execution mode (or when the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operating port 305, and the upper operating port 303 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the lower operation port 305 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower operation port 305 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operating port 305 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and a variable display is made. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the pattern variably displayed upon winning the lower operating port 305 may be referred to as a first special symbol or a first special diagram.

  In the second result display section BS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper operation port 303 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper operation port 303 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 303 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS, and the display is changed. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, it may be called the 2nd special symbol or the 2nd special figure which is variably displayed when the ball enters the upper working port 303.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 305 and 303, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS and BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 305 and 303 wins, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 307 provided in the lower operation port 305 is opened in a predetermined manner. Note that the pattern that is displayed in a variable manner upon winning through the through gate 35 may be referred to as a normal symbol or a normal symbol.

  Here, based on the winning to the through gate 35, the display of variation is started in the display portion 44 for an accessory, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above-mentioned variation display is stopped. This is equivalent to one game in the game. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game times in the result display units AS and BS, the game times in the accessory display unit 44 are also referred to as general game times, and the games in the main display unit 43 (result display units AS and BS). The times are also referred to as special figure game times (first special figure game times, second special figure game times).

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are used. Also good.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 303 or the lower working port 305. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In the symbol display device 41, not only the variation display of the special figure game times corresponding to the result display portions AS and BS, but also the variation display of the general game times corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is performed. The position and size of the variable display area on the display screen, the variable pattern, etc. are set differently for the special figure game times and the general figure game times. It is possible to visually distinguish the fluctuation display of each time. The areas where special figure game times and ordinary figure game times are performed will be described in detail later.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a first reserved light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 305 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first hold light emitting unit 45 is turned on. A second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper right part on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 303 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the second on-hold light emitting unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  A third reserved light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the center frame 42. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding light emitting unit 47.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 is housed and configured.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. When changing state such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for signal output (or during the transition to the state). And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<About the winning unit 301>
Next, the winning unit 301 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the winning unit 301 seen obliquely from the front, FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 5, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the flow-down situation of the game ball, and FIG. 10 is a front view showing the light emitting substrate.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the game board 24 includes a pair of left and right first and second game nails (so-called nail nails) 281 provided at the same height position below the variable display unit 36 (see FIG. 4). , 282, and third and fourth game nails (so-called jump nails) 283, 284 provided on the left and right of the first and second game nails 281 and 282, respectively. The winning unit 301 is disposed so as to be positioned below the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284.

  A first light emitting unit 311 is provided in the upper part of the winning unit 301, an upper winning part 313 is provided in the central part, and a lower winning part 315 is provided in the lower part. Further, second light emitting units 317 are provided on both left and right sides of the winning unit 301. The first light emitting unit 311, the top winning unit 313, the lower winning unit 315, and the second light emitting unit 317 are provided for the base body 320.

  The base body 320 is formed of a synthetic resin such as an ABS resin. The base body 320 is made opaque by being formed of an opaque member or by being subjected to a metal plating process on the surface thereof. The base body 320 includes a plate-like base portion 321 having a plate shape, and a portion of the base body 320 that protrudes in the thickness direction is integrally formed with the plate-like base portion 321. As shown in FIG. 7, the front surface 321a of the plate-like base portion 321 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L1 from the window panel 62 is larger than one game ball. For this reason, the game ball can flow down in front of the plate-like base portion 321.

  Here, the winning unit 301 includes a configuration as an operating port device by the upper winning unit 313 and the lower winning unit 315, a configuration as an illumination device by the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317, and a first light emitting unit 311. And a configuration as a game ball guiding device by the top winning unit 313. Hereafter, each structure is demonstrated in order.

<Regarding the configuration as an operating port device by the top winning section 313 and the bottom winning section 315>
As shown in FIG. 5, the top winning portion 313 includes an upper working port 303 and an opening / closing member 331 as an electric accessory 307 that opens and closes the upper working port 303.

  The upper working port 303 is open forward and has a horizontally long, substantially rectangular shape. An opening / closing member 331 is arranged so as to cover the upper working port 303 from the front (see FIG. 7). The opening / closing member 331 is formed in a plate shape and has a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The left-right width (longitudinal dimension) of the opening / closing member 331 is set to be approximately the same as the distance between the third game nail 283 and the fourth game nail 284, in other words, about three game balls. It is set to length. On the other hand, the vertical width (dimension in the short direction) of the opening / closing member 331 is set slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  The upper operation port 303 and the opening / closing member 331 are located below the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284. Specifically, one of the left and right ends of the opening / closing member 331 is located directly below the third game nail 283, and the other is located directly below the fourth game nail 284.

  The opening / closing member 331 is held by the base body 320 so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction (the thickness direction of the game board 24). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a lower end 331a of the opening / closing member 331 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable about the lower end 331a. Then, by rotating back and forth around the lower end portion 331a, the projection from the front surface of the game board 24 (plate-like base part 321) is suppressed, and a closed position (second position) covering the upper operation port 303, and the game board 24 (plate-like base portion 321) can be displaced to an open position (first position) that protrudes forward from the front surface 321a and opens the upper working port 303.

  The opening / closing member 331 has a front surface 331b substantially flush with the front surface 321a of the plate-like base portion 321 in the closed position (standing posture) so that no step is generated between the plate-like base portion 321 as much as possible. It is configured. Thereby, not only the game ball can pass in front of the opening / closing member 331, but also the game ball is prevented from being caught at the boundary between the plate-like base portion 321 and the opening / closing member 331, and the game ball flows smoothly. Is secured.

  As shown in FIG. 6, an electric accessory driving unit 332 that drives the opening / closing member 331 is attached to the back side of the base body 320. The electric accessory driving unit 332 includes a solenoid as a driving source and a link mechanism as driving force transmitting means for transmitting a driving force from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 331. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81. When the solenoid is driven, the opening / closing member 331 rotates from the closed position to the open position, and switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing member 331 is rotated from the open position to the closed position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and is switched from the open state to the closed state.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the base body 320 is formed with an upper guide passage 333 that guides the game ball that has entered the upper operation port 303 to the back side of the game board 24. The upper guide passage 333 extends rearward, and the game ball that has reached the upper guide passage 333 is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 333a. A detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the upper working port 303 is disposed at a midway position. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81 when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor. Yes. Based on this detection information, the main control device 81 determines whether or not there is a prize for the upper working port 303.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the lower winning portion 315 includes a lower working port case 337, and the lower working port case 337 opens upward to form a lower working port 305. The lower working port case 337 is disposed in the vicinity of the opening / closing member 331 below the upper winning portion 313. The lower working port case 337 protrudes forward from the front surface 321a of the plate-like base portion 321 as shown in FIG. The left and right width (that is, the left and right width of the lower working port 305) and the front and rear width (that is, the front and rear width of the lower working port 305) on the upper side of the lower working port case 337 are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Can be awarded to the lower operating port 305 one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the lower operation port case 337 is located below the first and second game nails 281 and 282. Specifically, one of the left and right ends of the lower working port case 337 (the lower working port 305) is positioned directly below the first game nail 281 and the other is positioned directly below the second game nail 282.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the base body 320 is formed with a lower guide passage 339 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower operation port 305 to the back side of the game board 24. The lower guide passage 339 extends rearward, and the game ball that has reached the lower guide passage 339 is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 339a. A detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the lower working port 305 is disposed at a midway position. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81 when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor. Yes. Based on this detection information, main controller 81 determines whether or not there is a prize for lower operating port 305.

  In the above configuration, the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 flows down the first flow path R1 toward the lower operation port 305 as shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 331 is located above the lower working port 305 and the both are arranged vertically, when the opening / closing member 331 is in the closed state, the opening / closing member 331 is removed from the first flow down path R1. By retreating (see FIG. 9A), the game ball can pass through the front of the opening / closing member 331 and can win the lower operation port 305.

  The game balls that have passed between the first and third game nails 281 and 283 and the game balls that have passed between the second and fourth game nails 282 and 284 are respectively the second and third flow down paths R2. , R3 flow down. However, these game balls pass through the side of the lower working port case 337 to the out port 37 (see FIG. 5) without winning the lower working port 305.

  As shown in FIGS. 8B and 9B, when the opening / closing member 331 is pivoted (tilted) forward from the closed position and displaced to the open position, the game ball can be received into the upper operating port 303. A region RA is formed on the first flow down path R1. That is, at the same time when the upper working port 303 is opened, the opening / closing member 331 intersects the first flow path R1 (the opening / closing member 331 is positioned on the first flow path R1). In this case, the opening / closing member 331 receives the game ball flowing down the first flow down path R1 on the back surface 331c and guides it to the upper operation port 303. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the first flow down path R1 wins the upper operating port 303 before reaching the lower operating port 305.

  Furthermore, since the receiving area RA is also formed on the second and third flow paths R2 and R3, game balls flowing down the second and third flow paths R2 and R3 also win the upper operating port 303. In other words, not only the first flow down path R1 but also the game balls flowing down on both the left and right sides can be awarded to the upper operation port 303.

  Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the opening / closing member 331 is positioned above the lower operation port 305 and both are disposed adjacent to each other, as shown in FIG. 9B, the opening / closing member 331 is switched to the open state. In such a case, the upper operation port 303 is opened, and at the same time, the opening / closing member 331 closes the lower operation port 305. Specifically, the opening / closing member 331 displaced to the open position covers the lower working port 305 from above. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between a game aimed at winning a prize at the lower operating port 305 and a game aimed at winning a prize at the upper operating port 303 from the player's perspective. As a result, when the opening / closing member 331 is switched to the open state, the player is prevented from being distracted by the lower operation port 305, and the electric accessory 307 and the upper operation port 303 can be effectively noted. It becomes possible.

<About the structure as an electrical decoration apparatus by the 1st and 2nd light emission parts 311 and 317>
As shown in FIG. 5, the first light emitting unit 311 is provided with a light transmitting part 341 having light transparency. The translucent part 341 is disposed in the vicinity of the opening / closing member 331 above the top winning part 313. The translucent part 341 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The left-right width of the translucent part 341 is set to be approximately the same as the left-right width of the opening / closing member 331. In other words, it is set to the length of about three game balls. The translucent portion 341 has a vertical width that is about two game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the translucent portion 341 has a front surface 341 a substantially flush with the front surface 321 a of the plate-like base portion 321. That is, the distance L2 to the window panel 62 is larger than that of one game ball. For this reason, each game ball flowing down the first to third flow paths R1 to R3 can flow down in front of the light transmitting part 341. The front surface 341a of the light transmitting part 341 is formed in a flat shape in order to prevent the flow of game balls on the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3 from being disturbed.

  Note that the entire front surface 341a may not be flat, and at least a region overlapping with the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3 only needs to be flat. Moreover, the translucent part 341 does not necessarily need to be formed from a single member, and the translucent part 341 may be configured by laminating a plurality of translucent members in the front-rear direction. In this case, it is preferable that the front surface of the foremost translucent member is flat.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the second light emitting portion 317 is provided with a protruding portion 347 that protrudes forward from the front surface 321 a of the plate-like base portion 321. Each protrusion 347 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency. Each projecting portion 347 is disposed in the vicinity of the light transmitting portion 341 on both the left and right sides of the light transmitting portion 341, and extends linearly in the vertical direction so as to straddle the light transmitting portion 341 and the top prize winning portion 313. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, each protrusion 347 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view, and the protrusion amount (front-rear width) is larger than that of one game ball. The front surface 347a of each protrusion 347 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L3 from the window panel 62 is smaller than one game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, a light diffusing plate 357 (light guide plate) and a light emitting substrate 359 on which a plurality of light emitters 360 (specifically LEDs) are mounted behind the light transmitting part 341 and the protruding part 347. And are arranged.

  The light diffusing plate 357 is obtained by performing a matte process (ground glass process) or an uneven process on the surface of a synthetic resin material having transparency. By providing the light diffusion plate 357, the light that has passed through the light transmitting portion 341 and the protruding portion 347 is dispersed in multiple directions, and the opposite side is not clearly visible. That is, the light diffusion plate 357 diffuses the light from the light emitter 360 and plays the role of making the light emitting substrate 359 and the light emitter 360 difficult to view or not visible when viewed from the front, specifically, the light emitting substrate 359 and the light emitter 360. Yes.

  The light-emitting board 359 is disposed so that the mounting surface of the light-emitting body 360 faces the front of the gaming machine. Each light emitting body 360 is arranged so as to be located behind the light transmitting portion 341 and the projecting portion 347, and is disposed so that the light emitting surface faces the front. The light emitted from each light emitting body 360 is diffused by the light diffusion plate 357 and then enters each of the light transmitting part 341 and the protruding part 347. As shown in FIG. 7, a predetermined cut process for light diffusion is performed on the back surface 341b of the light transmitting portion 341 and the back surface of the protruding portion 347, thereby forming irregularities. For this reason, the light incident on the light transmitting portion 341 and the protruding portion 347 is further diffused by the unevenness, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 341 and the protruding portion 347 and is irradiated forward. Thereby, it can be made to visually recognize so that the whole region of the translucent part 341 and the protrusion part 347 may emit light.

  In the case where the translucent part 341 has a laminated structure of a plurality of translucent members, the unevenness may be formed on the back surface of the frontmost translucent member, or the second and subsequent translucent members from the front. You may form in the front surface or back surface of an optical member.

  The light emitting substrate 359 is electrically connected to the effect control device 82. By performing the light emission control according to the game situation by the effect control device 82, the light emission effect corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the opening and closing member 331 is executed. Details of the light emission effect will be described later.

<About the structure as a guide device by the 1st light emission part 311 and the top winning part 313>
As shown in FIG. 6, two first guide portions 365 capable of guiding a game ball flowing down in front of the light transmitting portion 341 are provided on the front surface 341 a of the light transmitting portion 341. Each first guide portion 365 protrudes forward from the front surface 341a of the light transmitting portion 341 and has a plate shape. These first guide portions 365 are integrally formed with the light transmitting portion 341 and have light transmission properties like the light transmitting portion 341.

  Each first guide portion 365 has the same length and extends vertically, and specifically extends linearly from the upper end to the lower end of the translucent portion 341. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, each first guide portion 365 has a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long in a side view, and the protruding amount (front-rear width) is larger than that of one game ball. . The front surface 365a of each first guide portion 365 faces the window panel 62, and the distance L4 from the window panel 62 is smaller than one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 8, these first guide portions 365 are arranged in parallel with an interval through which one game ball can pass, and are respectively located directly below the game nails 281 and 282. As shown in FIG. 7, the distance L5 between the upper surface 365b of each first guide portion 365 and each game nail 281 and 282 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, only game balls that have passed between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 can pass through the first flow down path R1.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, on the front surface 331 b of the opening / closing member 331 of the top winning portion 313, two second guide portions 371 capable of guiding a game ball flowing down the front of the opening / closing member 331 are provided. . Each 2nd guide part 371 protrudes ahead from the front surface 331b of the opening-and-closing member 331, and has comprised plate shape. These second guide portions 371 are integrally formed with the opening / closing member 331.

  Each of the second guide portions 371 has the same length and extends vertically. Specifically, the second guide portion 371 extends linearly from the upper end of the opening / closing member 331 to the middle position thereof. These second guide portions 371 are arranged so as to be continuous from the respective first guide portions 365. Specifically, the second guide portion 371 and the first guide portion 365 are arranged so that the central axes in the left-right direction coincide with each other, and both are aligned in a straight line in front view. The thickness (width) of each second guide portion 371 is substantially the same as that of each first guide portion 365.

  With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 8, the flow of the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 is defined downward in the first and second guide portions 365 and 371, respectively. The When the opening / closing member 331 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball is guided to the lower operation port 305 by both the first and second guide portions 365 and 371. . On the other hand, when the open / close member 331 is switched to the open state, as shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball is guided to the back surface 331c (ball receiving surface) of the open / close member 331 by the first guide portion 365. The

  In this way, the game balls after passing through the first to fourth game nails 281 to 284 are guided by the first guide part 365 and the second guide part 371, so that the game is played in front of the translucent part 341 and the opening / closing member 331. The rampage of the ball is suppressed. Thereby, it is suppressed that the winning probability to the lower operation port 305 and the upper operation port 303 is excessively reduced, and the player can be relieved. At the same time, the visibility of the light-emitting effect in the light-transmitting part 341 is also prevented from lowering due to the influence of the game ball flowing in front of the light-transmitting part 341. In addition, since the guide path of the game ball is clearly indicated by the first and second guide portions 365 and 371, the game ball is likely to win the player in the lower operation port 305 and the upper operation port 303 in appearance. It is easy to be guided), and it also leads to an increase in game motivation.

  Incidentally, since the protruding portion 347 of the second light emitting portion 317 is erected, it is between the first game nail 281 and the third game nail 283 and between the second game nail 282 and the fourth game nail 284. Each game ball that has passed through is also guided to the upper operation port 303. Further, the presence of the protruding portion 347 suppresses the entry of the game ball from the side to the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3. As a result, other game balls collide with the game balls on the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3 from the side, and the game balls may be repelled to the outside of the upper operation port 303 or the lower operation port 305. It is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 7, each second guide portion 371 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view, and the protrusion amount (front-rear width) is suppressed to be smaller than that of each first guide portion 365. Yes. Each second guide portion 371 is displaced with the rotation of the opening / closing member 331, and the collision of each second guide portion 371 with the window panel 62 is avoided by suppressing the projection amount of each second guide portion 371. Has been. Thereby, damage to each 2nd guide part 371 and the window panel 62 accompanying the displacement of the opening / closing member 331 is suppressed. In avoiding a collision with the window panel 62, the protruding amount of each second guide portion 371 balances with the height position of each second guide portion 371 relative to the opening / closing member 331, the rotation angle of the opening / closing member 331, and the like. However, when viewed from the viewpoint of guiding the game ball, the radius is preferably equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball.

  A distance L6 between the upper surface 371a (upper end portion) of the second guide portion 371 and the lower surface 365c (lower end portion) of the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, it is suppressed that the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 moves to the other flow paths R2 and R3 through the space between the first guide part 365 and the second guide part 371. Thereby, the game ball on the first flow down path R1 can be properly guided to the lower operation port 305.

  Further, since the distance L6 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the first guide portion 365 is caused to function as a suppression unit that suppresses the collision of the game ball from above with respect to the upper surface 371a of the second guide portion 371. be able to. The opening / closing member 331 is configured to open the upper operation port 303 by rotating forward from the closed position (standing posture). When a game ball collides with the upper surface 371a of the second guide portion 371 from above, There is a concern that the opening / closing member 331 is rotated forward by the impact, and the upper operation port 303 is opened regardless of the switching control. In this case, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the upper operating port 303 against the game design, and there is a risk that the game hole will be lost. In this regard, since the first guide portion 365 functions as a suppressing unit, the unexpected opening of the opening / closing member 331 is suppressed, and the above inconvenience can be preferably solved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the protruding amount of the second guide portion 371 is smaller than that of the first guide portion 365, the first guide portion 365 extends the entire upper surface of the second guide portion 371 from above. It becomes the aspect which covers, and the collision of the game ball from the upper part is further suppressed. In addition, from the point of functioning as suppression means, the thickness (width) of the first guide portion 365 may be larger than that of the second guide portion 371.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the distance L7 between the lower surface 371b (lower end portion) of the second guide portion 371 and the lower operation port 305 (the upper end portion of the lower operation port case 337) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. . With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 moves sideways through the space between the second guide portion 371 and the lower operation port 305, and can deviate from the first flow path R1. As a result, it is avoided that the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281 and 282 always wins the lower operating port 305, and the monotonization of the game is suppressed, or between the game nails 281 and 282 The player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball that has passed through can be maintained.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 202 are a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211, and the like. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as part of various detection sensors 211, a prize-winning entry portion (payout correspondence entry portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operation opening 303, a lower operation opening 305, and a through gate 35 is provided. A plurality of detection sensors are connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery generation lottery based on winning at the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 305, and executes a support generation lottery based on the winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the lower operating port 305 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and output to the upper operating port 303. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  The effect control device 82 includes a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, an ending command, and other special command effect commands related to special figure game times, a change command related to ordinary game times, and a type command. Various production commands such as a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination driving unit 332 that opens and closes the electric combination 307 of the upper working port 303, and a main display unit. 43 and the display part 44 for an accessory are connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electric combination 307 is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 332 so that the electric combination 307 is opened and closed. In each special figure game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main winning operation in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is executed. Display control of the round display part RS in the display part 43 is executed. In the ordinary game game, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MOU 202, and the support state is displayed in the accessory display unit 44 in the support state in which the electric accessory 307 is selected in the open state. Display control indicating winning is executed.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal 99, information on entrance to the various entrances and jackpots to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. The information regarding the lottery result such as is output. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the state and the like of the pachinko machine 10 by the hall computer HC.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The production control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the on-hold light emitting units 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36, the display light emitting unit 63 provided on the front door frame 14, and the winning unit. The first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 and the speaker unit 64 provided in 301 are driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

  In the display control device 212, display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, in the production control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the symbol display time on the symbol display device 41 and finally the combination type of symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, there are three symbols, upper, middle, and lower, in the approximate center of the display screen G as the variable display area of the special figure game times. Columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the display screen G is designed to stop and display three symbols for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R probability variable jackpot result, or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a probable big hit result occurs, the same specific symbol combination Is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  A first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first hold light emitting unit 45 is set on the left side in the lower part of the display screen G, and a second hold light emitting part 46 is set on the right side in the lower part of the display screen G. A second hold display area Gb is set.

  In the first hold display area (non-priority hold display area) Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when a game ball wins the lower operation port 305 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the lower operating port 305 is four. Correspondingly, the first reserved display area Ga includes the first unit reserved display area Ga1, the second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305 is 1, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball is placed in the lower operation port 305. When the number of holds when winning is 4, the predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4.

  In the second hold display area (priority hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 303 is four. Correspondingly, the second reserved display area Gb includes the first unit reserved display area Gb1, second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

  For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operation port 303 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the upper operation port 303. In the case where the number of holds is 4, the hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Gb1 to the fourth unit hold display area Gb4.

  In the display screen G, the above-described symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the holding display areas Ga and Gb are not overlapped with each other, more specifically, the upper part of the display screen G is a general-purpose display area as a variable-display display area. P is set. The general map display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display units, and variable display is possible by switching display colors in each of these display units. Further, the general symbol display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and each display portion in the general symbol display area P is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

  The general-purpose display area P corresponds to the accessory display section 44, and when the variable display is performed on the accessory display section 44, the variable display is also performed on the general-purpose display area P. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 together with the accessory display unit 44.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery generation of jackpots, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining jackpot types such as a probable jackpot result and a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43 The variation type for determining the variation display time of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 It has been decided to use the counter CS. Further, when determining the open random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 307 of the upper working port 303 is set to the electric open state, and the open type in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 is set. The open type counter C5 to be used is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and C4 to C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is obtained when a winning to the lower working port 305 or the upper working port 303 occurs. The stored information is stored in a reserved ball storage area 232 as an acquisition information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display section and a holding area Rb for the second result display section, and a first execution area AE1. The reserved areas Ra and Rb respectively include a first area Ra1 and Rb1, a second area Ra2 and Rb2, a third area Ra3 and Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4 and Rb4. In accordance with the winning history, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is held as any of the areas. Stored in Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth area Ra4, Rb4, when the winning to the lower working port 305 or the upper working port 303 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first areas Ra1, Rb1 → first Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 2 area Ra2, Rb2 → third area Ra3, Rb3 → fourth area Ra4, Rb4. By providing four areas in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303 are each stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area specifies the number in which the winning history for the lower operating port 305 or the upper operating port 303 is stored. To store information.

  The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the holding areas Ra and Rb when the variable display on the main display unit 43 is started. At the start of the figure game times, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305 or the upper operation port 303. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the special table success / failure table includes the special probability success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 14 (a) and the high probability in FIG. 14 (b). A special figure success / failure table for mode (high probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the special drawing lottery, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result that is normally lost except for the value of the random number that is a big win.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie 99). Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are based on the following two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the pass / fail lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 307 of the upper working port 303 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing the difference, multiple jackpot results are set.

  As a support mode of the upper working port 303 in the electric accessory 307, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric accessory 307 in the upper working port 303 is used. The low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) ) And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 307 is in the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode. It is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 307 occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize will be generated in the upper working port 303 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 305 than in the upper operating port 303, but in the high frequency support mode, the higher operating port 303 is connected to the upper operating port 303. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the upper operating port 303, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by changing any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

  The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305 or the upper operation port 303. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C 2 is stored as a type table (distribution information group) in the type table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 203.

  In this embodiment, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result are set as types of the jackpot result. The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the type table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 15A, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 39” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result. “40 to 89” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and “90 to 99” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  On the other hand, in the type table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 15B, only the 6R normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destinations. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 39” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and “40 to 99” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning at the upper operating port 303 and the winning at the lower operating port 305. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the type table for the first result display unit or the type table for the second result display unit is used, the probability that the jackpot result will be the same when the jackpot is won is the same. That is, in the type table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 60. Further, in the type table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 60. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is determined based on the winning win based on the winning at the lower operating port 305 and the winning win based on the winning at the upper operating port 303 (Specifically 60%).

  However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 and a promising big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big winning result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 305 and In the case of a probable jackpot result, a 6R probable jackpot result is obtained with a probability of 50%, and a 15R probable jackpot result is obtained with a probability of 10%. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning of the upper actuation port 303. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  As described above, the lower operation port 305 and the upper operation port 303 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 303 among the lower operating port 305 and the upper operating port 303, and accordingly, the winning frequency in the upper operating port 303. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305 or the upper operation port 303. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the special game game transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the special figure game times, the stop display result after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started in the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result. This is a display state for making the player think that the change display state is likely to be the special display result before being derived and displayed.

  In other words, a combination of reach symbols in which a combination of jackpot symbols may be established by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed, and in this state, the symbols are displayed in a variable state in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the display of symbol variation, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  When the display content of FIG. 12 is demonstrated concretely, first, the high-speed fluctuation display is started about all the symbol rows Z1-Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. When the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. It is done. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 305 or the upper operation port 303. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 305, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the open random number counter C 4 and the open type counter C 5 is stored in the electric role reservation area 233 as an acquisition information storage means on the normal side when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Stored.

  The electric role holding area 233 includes an electric role holding area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for usual use. The holding area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 in accordance with a winning history to the through gate 35. Each numerical information of the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is stored in any area as hold information.

  In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, the first area Rc1 → the second area Rc2 → the third area Rc3 → the fourth area when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs a plurality of times continuously. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of Rc4. Since each of the four areas is provided in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the through gate 35 are stored on hold.

  The second execution area AE2 for usual use is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the holding area Rc when starting the variable display of the accessory display unit 44. At the start of the ordinary game game, the release determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

  For details of each counter on the normal side, the open random number counter C4 is, for example, sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role reservation area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a general drawing lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 307 to the open state based on the stored value of the open random number counter C4.

  The random number value that is won in the support status in the general drawing lottery is stored in the validity table storage area 221 as the validity information group storage means in the ROM 203 as a common-use success / failure table. As already explained, in the common drawing lottery, the probability of becoming a support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the level of the support mode, and the universal figure success / failure table stored in the ROM 203 is also the same. A common table is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), if the open random number counter C4 = 0 to 99 in the common-use acceptance table, the electric accessory 307 is shifted to a support state for controlling the open state, and C4 = 100. If it is ˜199, the electric accessory 307 is set so as not to shift to the support state without being controlled to the open state.

  Here, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the support state, the occurrence frequency of winning in the electric accessory 307 from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high. A high winning support state and a low winning support state are set. Furthermore, two types, a first high-winning support state and a second high-winning support state, are set as high-winning support states.

  Specifically, in the first high-winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is performed until 3 seconds elapses or the electric accessory 307 (upper The operation is continued until the number of winnings in the operation port 303) reaches five. Further, in the second high winning support state, the opening and closing of the electric accessory 307 is performed twice from the start to the end of the support state, and one opening is performed until 2 seconds elapses or the electric accessory 307 (upward operation) This is continued until the number of winnings in the mouth 303) reaches 10. Incidentally, in the second high winning support state, the closing period (waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 sec.

  In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is continued until 0.2 sec elapses or to the electric accessory 307 (upper operation port 303). This is continued until the number of winnings reaches three.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 53 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of one electric accessory 307 is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 307 is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, the game ball is not substantially won.

  It should be noted that the number of opening / closing times of the electric accessory 307 in the high winning support state and the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high winning support state. As long as the frequency of winning a prize to the upper operating port 303 is increased from the start to the end of the support state, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high winning support state has more opening / closing times than the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-winning support state and the low-winning support state, in the support state related to the low-winning support state, there is substantially no winning to the upper operating port 303. It is good to do. For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game ball and the opening time of the one upper operation port 303 are not as described above, in the low winning support state, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the upper working port 303 does not occur substantially.

  The game result distribution destination for the open type counter C5 is stored as a type table (distribution information group) in the type table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the common table type table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, the common type table for the low frequency support mode shown in FIG. 16A is set as the common type table.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), as the distribution destination of the normal drawing win, the first release result (the first support result) and the second release result (the first support result) 2 support result) is set. The first release result is a distribution result that is in a low-winning support state, and the second release result is a distribution result that is in a first high-winning support state. In the common type table in the low frequency support mode, among the values of the open type counter C5 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 89” corresponds to the first open result, and “90 to 99” is set. Corresponds to the second opening result. In other words, if the result of the normal lottery lottery shifts to the support state in the low frequency support mode, 90% of the lottery shifts to the low win support state, and the remaining 10% is the first high win support state. Migrate to

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the open / close control mode of the electric accessory 307 in the high frequency support mode is only the second high winning support state. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the result of the usual lottery lottery results in shifting to the support state, the shift to the second high winning support state is always performed.

  As already described, in the MPU 202, the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first execution area AE1. However, in the determination, the special display variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used. In addition, the MPU 202 determines stop results in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1. However, for the determination, the special figure stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the lower working port 305, a winning detection flag for the lower working port is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and a ball enters the upper working port 303. If it is determined that the winning action has been made, a winning detection flag for the upper working port is stored in the various flag storage area 235. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are each incremented by 1 and each of them reaches 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. clear. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through winning process will be described later.

  Thereafter, after the winning process for the operation port is executed in step S105, the timer interruption process is terminated. In the winning process for the operating port, based on the fact that a game ball has won one of the operating ports 305, 303, a winning ball command for setting the game ball to be paid out based on the winning is set, and a jackpot random number counter Information acquisition processing for storing each value of C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is performed.

<Winning winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won (entered) the through gate 35 by confirming whether a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the game ball has not won the through gate 35, the winning process is terminated. If the through gate 35 has been won, an external signal setting process is performed in step S202 in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the through gate 35.

  In step S203, a value stored in the number-of-holds storage area for storing the number of hold information in the reserved role area Rc is read, and the number of hold information stored in the reserved role area Rc is shown. It is determined whether the reserved storage number FN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the usual figure reserved memory number FN is the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the ordinary figure reserved memory number FN is incremented by 1 in step S204. In step S205, a process of storing each value of the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S309 and S310 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, if an effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S303, a game time control process for controlling a game in each special figure game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination on the special symbol side, symbol variable display setting by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

  After the game times control process of step S303 is executed, the process proceeds to step S304, and a game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S305, a power combination support process for controlling the game in the usual game side game round is executed. In this electric support support process, the support determination on the normal side, the setting of the variable display of the symbol display device 41, the display control of the accessory display unit 44, the electric accessory 307 provided in the upper operating port 303, and the like. Drive control is performed.

  Each process of step S303 to step S305 will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S306, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

  In a succeeding step S307, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 204. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 205 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 202, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S308, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. In step S310, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, as in step S302, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S303 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game times starting process in steps S403 to S405 and the game times progressing process in steps S406 to S409. End control processing. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the special game play is not started regardless of whether or not a winning is made for the operation ports 305 and 303.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is based on whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. This is done by judging. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S403 to S405. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the start pending storage numbers RaN and RbN, is “0”. The case where the common reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the lower operating port 305 and the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, in order to set the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display part or the hold area Rb for the second result display part in step S404 for variable display. After the data setting process is executed, and the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is further executed in step S405, the game turn control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the change start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S502 to S507 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S508 to S513.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb, the second result display portion reservation corresponding to the upper operation port 303 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S502, the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display section hold area Ra is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S503, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of 1st result display part reservation area Ra in step S505 is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 → the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4 → the third area Ra3.

  In the subsequent step S506, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S507, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the presentation control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. . In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first result display area reserved area Ra, that is, the lower operation port 305. A special figure shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The special figure shift command set in step S507 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, the number of the hold is reduced based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the first hold light emitting unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41. Execute the process to change in accordance with.

  In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S508, the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S509, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S510, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display section reservation area Rb is moved to the first execution area AE1.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S511 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side. The data in the first area Rb1 is cleared and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as first area Rb1, third area Rb3 → second area Rb2, and fourth area Rb4 → third area Rb3.

  In the subsequent step S512, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S513, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the presentation control apparatus 82, which is the sub-side control apparatus, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. . In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the upper operating port 303. The special figure shift command including information indicating that the action is being performed is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The special figure shift command set in step S513 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). In the effect control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second hold light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 are decreased. Execute the process to change in accordance with.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Determine whether. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of any probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S602 with reference to the low probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is equal to the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. Determine whether you are doing it. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the determination of success / failure is performed by referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode in step S603. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is equal to the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. Determine whether you are doing it.

  After the process of step S602 or step S603, in step S604 to step S612, a process for setting the game result of the current special figure game times is executed, and the first result display is performed in the current special figure game times. For example, a process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by either the part AS or the second result display part BS is terminated is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

  Specifically, first, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S602 or step S603 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S605 to S610, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big win and a process for setting a stop result are executed.

  In step S605, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S606, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the type table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 15A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot result, the numerical range of the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Determine if it is.

  On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, in step S607, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the type table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 15B). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in the numerical range of the 6R normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  After the process of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, whether the game result distributed in step S606 or step S607 is any probability variation jackpot result (either 6R probability variation jackpot result or 15R probability variation jackpot result) Determine whether or not. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S609, a stop result corresponding to occurrence of a probable jackpot result is displayed in the current special figure game times in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS. In this state, stop result setting processing for probability variation big hit to set to end the variable display is executed. In step S609, information (either 6R probability variation flag or 15R probability variation flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 which probability variation jackpot result is the result of determining whether or not the current special figure game times is a success or failure is stored in the RAM 204. Store in the flag storage area 235.

  On the other hand, when the game result distributed in step S606 or step S607 is not the probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S608, and the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, the stop result table for normal jackpot is referred to, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 204. Is stored in the stop result address storage area. In step S 610, information (normal jackpot flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 whether the current determination result of the special figure game times is a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  If the result of the lottery in step S602 or step S603 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S604, and the flow proceeds to step S611. In step S611, a miss for setting which one of the stop results is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS to end the variable display in the present special figure game round that is the result of the miss. Execute the stop result setting process for the hour.

  After executing any of the processes of step S609, step S610, and step S611, in step S612, the variable display time of the current special figure game times in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is set. The process of setting the variable display time for the purpose is executed. In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected from the variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. . In the variable display time table, a game corresponding to the big win and a game corresponding to the missed result are set for each game time of the first and second special drawings. Thereby, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the variation display time can be varied depending on the game result. As a result, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the variable display time that is set.

  In the subsequent step S613, a special figure change command and a special figure type command are set. The special figure change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The special figure type command includes information on game results. That is, the special figure type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, 6R probability variation jackpot result information, 6R normal jackpot result information, and the like as game result information.

  The special figure change command and special figure type command set in step S613 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the special figure game times based on the received special figure change command and the special figure type command, and sets various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. Control. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each special symbol game time is performed.

  After that, in step S614, the variable display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times is identified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit When the flag is stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 20), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current special figure game times has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the result display unit is controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit relating to the current special figure game times (light emission control of each display segment). ) And the game times control process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S408. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any one of steps S609, S610, and S611 of the change start process (FIG. 22), and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43. The main display unit 43 is controlled so as to be stopped.

  In the subsequent step S409, a special figure change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The special figure change end command set in step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the special figure game times is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) by receiving the special figure change end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change display of the picture in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one special figure game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the game result of the current special figure game times corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 6R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S704. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S705, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In a succeeding step S706, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is 15R big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not 15R big hit, that is, if 6R probability variation big hit or 6R normal big hit, “6” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S707. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if it is 15R big hit, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S708.

  After executing the processing in step S707 or step S708, a special figure opening command is set in step S709. The set special figure opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This special figure opening command includes information on whether 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot or 15R jackpot. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received special figure opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S710, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether any of the 6R probability variation flag, 15R probability variation flag, or normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, the external output terminal 99 is determined. The signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in is a jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, in step S712, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. Here, the special winning opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big prize opening 32a is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” in step S802, and provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S803. It is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”.

  When the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” or when the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” and the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S804, and variable prize driving is performed to open the big prize opening 32a. The unit 32c is set in a driving state.

  In the subsequent step S805, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the special winning opening 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  In the subsequent step S806, “10” is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a. Thereafter, a special figure release command is set in step S807, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set special figure release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  On the other hand, if the big prize opening is open in step S801, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. If the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S809 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step S810, and then the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is “0” in step S811. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the first timer area T1 is “0” in step S808, or if the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is “0” in step S811, it is confirmed that the special winning opening closing condition has been established. means. In such a case, in step S812, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In step S813, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, in step S815, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 as a period for maintaining the special winning opening 32a in the closed state. Thereafter, a special figure closing command is set in step S816, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set special figure closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S814 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S817. In the start process, an ending standby time for waiting without starting the next special figure game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S818, after setting a special figure ending command, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set special figure ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect based on the received special figure ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 23), after executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S712, it is determined in step S713 whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. In step S714, it is determined whether the ending waiting time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S715. In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Specifically, if the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a probabilistic jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the normal jackpot result is obtained. If the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state is shifted to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times.

  In step S716, a process for ending the display of the round display unit RS is executed. In step S717, an opening / closing execution mode ending process is executed, and then the gaming state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed and various counters and flags used during the opening / closing execution mode are deleted.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the electric role support process, a general game game time control process is executed in step S901, a general game state transition process is executed in step S902, and the support process is terminated.

  That is, the electric role support process basically has the same configuration as that of the special game side game turn control process (FIG. 20) and the game state transition process (FIG. 23). In other words, the general game play control process in step S901 corresponds to the special game side game turn control process in FIG. 20, and the general game state transition process in step S902 corresponds to the special game side game state transfer process in FIG. doing. Hereinafter, the game time control process (step S901) and the game state transition process (step S902) on the normal side will be described in detail.

<General game play control processing>
First, the general game play control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the general game play control process, it is determined in step S1001 whether or not it is in a support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support status flag (support status information) is stored (stored) in the support status flag storage area (support status information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The support state flag is stored when shifting to the support state in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed in the general game state transition process described later, and similarly when the support state is ended in the general game state transition process. Will be erased.

  If it is in the support state, the process after step S1002, that is, the general game game start process in steps S1003 to S1005 and the general game game progress process in steps S1006 to S1009 are not executed. Then, the ordinary figure game times control process is terminated. That is, when the player is in the support state, the usual game game is not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred.

  If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the accessory display unit 44 is in a variable display. In this determination, the normal variation display flag (second variation display information) is stored in the normal variation display flag storage area (second variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 ( This is done by determining whether or not it is stored. The normal fluctuation display flag is stored when the variable display of the accessory display unit 44 is started, and is deleted when the fluctuation display ends.

  If the accessory display unit 44 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the general game game start process in steps S1003 to S1005. In the general game game start process, first, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the general graphic hold memory number FN is “0”. In the case where the customary reserved storage number FN is “0”, the power support process is terminated as it is.

  If the usual figure reserved storage number FN is not “0”, a usual figure data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserved role area Rc for variable display in step S1004 is executed. In the normal data setting process, the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is decremented by one, and the data stored in the first area of the call-use reserved area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. And the process which shifts the data stored in each memory | storage area of the electric power holding area Rc is performed. That is, the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side, and the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared and the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1. The data in each area is shifted such that the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2 and the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3. Then, a general map shift command (general map shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the presentation control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area on the normal map side has been shifted is set. To do. In this case, the ordinary figure shift command is read from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the ordinary figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  After executing the ordinary figure data setting process in step S1004, the ordinary figure variation start process is executed in step S1005, and then the ordinary figure game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the universal change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the normal fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the game state transition process on the special figure side, and then erased when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game times continue 100 times).

  If it is not the high-frequency support mode, the success / failure determination (support lottery) is performed by referring to the success / failure table for the low-frequency support mode in step S1102, and if it is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the frequency support mode. As already described, in the present embodiment, the common use pass / fail table is used regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table referenced in step S1102 and the step S1103 are referred to. The success / failure table to be referred to is the same (see FIG. 14C). Therefore, it is good also as a structure which abbreviate | omits the process which determines the height of the support mode in step S1101.

  After the process of step S1102 or step S1103, in step S1104 to step S1112 a process for setting the game result of the current ordinary figure game times is executed, and the display for an accessory in the current ordinary figure game times is performed. For example, processing for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by the unit 44 is terminated is executed. When setting a stop result, out of various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in a stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, a stop result table for ordinary use Is referenced.

  Specifically, first, in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1102 or step S1103 is a support status win. In the case where the support state is won, in steps S1105 to S1111 a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case where the support state is won are executed.

  In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the high-frequency support mode flag is set, the second high-winning support state is generated as a stop result of the accessory display unit 44 in the current game drawing game round in step S1106. A stop result setting process for the second high-winning support state is executed to set the end of the variable display in the displayed state. Also, in step S1106, the RAM 204 stores information (second high winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of determining whether or not the current game game is successful is a release result that results in the second high winning support state. Are stored in the various flag storage areas 235.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support mode flag is not stored, in step S1107, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the common type table for low frequency support mode (FIG. 16A). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the first release result or the numerical range of the second release result.

  In subsequent step S1108, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S1107 is a result (second release result) that is in a first high winning support state. If the result is that the first high-winning support state is set, in step S1109, the first high-winning support state is generated as a result of the stoppage of the display unit 44 for the objects in the current game game round. A stop result setting process for the first high-winning support state is executed to set that the variable display is terminated in a state where the fact is displayed. In step S1109, information (first high winning support flag) for specifying in the MP 204 that the MPU 202 specifies that the result of determining whether or not the current common game game is the first high winning support state is stored in the RAM 204. Store in the flag storage area 235.

  In subsequent step S1110, a first high winning support command is set. The set first high winning support command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect based on the received first high prize support command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  On the other hand, if the game result assigned in step S1108 is not the result of the first high winning support state, that is, if the distributed game result is the first opening result and the low winning support state, the low result is obtained in step S1111. A stop result setting process for the low winning support state is executed for setting that the variable display is to be ended in a state where it is displayed that the winning support state will occur. In step S1111, various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 store information (low winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of determining whether or not the current game game is successful is an open result that results in a low winning support state. Stored in H.235.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, in step S1112, the first high winning support state, the second high winning support state, and the low are determined as the stop result of the accessory display unit 44 in the current general game play time. A stop result setting process for losing is executed for setting that the variable display is to be ended in a state in which none of the winning support states is displayed. In step S1112, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the current normal game game success / failure determination result is an outage result is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S1106 and S1110 to S1112, in step S1113, the normal map variable display time for setting the variable display time of the current general game game time on the accessory display unit 44. Execute the setting process.

  In the processing for setting the normal map display time, the presence or absence of the high frequency support mode flag is checked to determine whether it is the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode. Is acquired, and a value corresponding to the information is set in a general-purpose variable display time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. . On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, the customary variable display time information for the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 203 is acquired, and values corresponding to the information are stored in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is set in the usual map change display time counter area. With these common map variable display time information for the high frequency support mode and general map variable display time information for the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode averages the variable display time than the low frequency support mode. Is set to be shorter. In the present embodiment, 20 sec is uniformly set as the common map display time information for the low frequency support mode.

  For each of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, a variable display time table in which a plurality of types of variable display times are set is stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and each of the variable display times is A configuration may be adopted in which the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter for ordinary use is selected from the table. In this case, a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the high frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the low frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. In addition, the variable display time may be set differently depending on the number of the general-purpose reserved memory number FN as well as the value of the variable-type counter for general-purpose maps. The variable display time may be set to be short, and vice versa.

  After executing the normal map change display time setting process in step S1113, in step S1114, a normal map change command and a general map type command are set. The common map change command includes information on the normal map change display time. Further, the game type command includes game result information.

  The common map change command and the common map type command set in step S1114 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the ordinary game game based on the received ordinary map change command and the ordinary map type command, and sets various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. Control. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to perform a variable display of symbols corresponding to each ordinary game time.

  After that, in step S1115, the display of change in the pattern is started on the display unit for an accessory 44. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the general-purpose game times control process (FIG. 26), when the accessory display unit 44 is variably displayed, the general-purpose game times progression process of steps S1006 to S1009 is executed. In the process for progressing the general game times, first, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current general game times has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information for ordinary use stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the usual variable display time setting process. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1007. In the variable display processing, display of the accessory display unit 44 is controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the accessory display unit 44 (light emission control of each display segment). Then, the ordinary figure game times control process is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed, a variable end process is executed in step S1008. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any one of the above steps S1106, S1109, S1111 and S1112, and the symbol corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44. The accessory display unit 44 is controlled.

  In a succeeding step S1009, a normal change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The common map change end command set in step S1009 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and the like so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the general game game times is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) by receiving the normal diagram change end command.

<Normal game state transition processing>
Next, the general game state transition process of step S902 in the electric role support process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not it is in a support state. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change display of the symbol of one ordinary game game is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the fluctuation display for the usual figure has ended, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the game result of the current ordinary figure game round corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, a support state start process is executed in step S1204. In the start process, a waiting time for a normal opening for waiting for the opening of the support state without starting the opening of the electric accessory 307 is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the normal opening that is stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the counter area for the normal waiting time provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The waiting time for the usual opening is set to 2.0 sec for the first high-winning support state (see FIG. 16B), and 0.2 sec for the second high-winning support state and the low-winning support state. It is set (see FIGS. 16B and 16C).

  In a succeeding step S1205, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, it means that the current support state is the first high-winning support state or the low-winning support state, so that the second provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1206. “1” is set in the round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened. On the other hand, if the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, it means that the current support state is the second high-winning support state, and therefore, in step S1207, “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2. To do.

  After executing the process of step S1206 or step S1207, a normal map opening command is set in step S1208. The set general map opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This ordinary figure opening command includes information indicating that it is in the first high winning support state and waiting time information for ordinary figure opening. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the support state based on the received ordinary opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

  In subsequent step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the accessory release signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the open signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device outputs the accessory release signal to the pachinko machine 10. That the support status has occurred.

  In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the first high-winning support flag or the second high-winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204. If either flag is stored, the external output terminal The signal output state of the output terminal for the high winning support state signal provided at 99 is set as the high winning support state signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the high winning support status signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the high winning support status signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. 10, it can be understood that a high winning support state has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that it is in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step S1211. Here, the accessory opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the electric accessory driving unit 332. If the electric accessory 307 is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” in step S1302, and provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1303. It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, or when the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the real accessory opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” and the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the electric accessory 307 is opened to release the electric accessory 307. The drive unit 332 is set in a drive state (a combination release process).

  In subsequent step S1305, setting processing for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is not the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the support state is the first high winning support state. If it is in the first high winning support state, in step S1403, “1500” (that is, 3 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the electric accessory 307. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the subsequent step S1404, “5” is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the electric accessory 307. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If the support state is not the first high-winning support state in step S1402, this means that the support state is the low-winning support state, and therefore “100” (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. . In subsequent step S1406, “3” is set in the second winning counter area PC2, and the setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the support mode is the high frequency support mode in step S1401, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1407. In a succeeding step S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is “2”. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “2”, this setting process is terminated. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “2”, the second winning counter area PC2 is set in step S1409. “10” is set, and the setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the accessory opening / closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the setting process for each round in step S1305, the normal figure opening command is set in step S1306, and the accessory opening / closing process ends. The set general map release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This normal release command includes information indicating that it is in the first high winning support state. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received normal map release command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If the electric accessory 307 is open in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1307, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not a game ball has won the upper operating port 303 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 303. . If no prize has been generated, the main article opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S1309, and then the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is “0” in step S1310. If it is not "0", the main article opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” in step S1307, or if the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is “0” in step S1310, it means that the accessory closing condition is satisfied. . In such a case, in step S1311, the electric accessory driving unit 332 is set in a non-driven state to close the electric accessory 307 (an accessory closing process).

  In the subsequent step S1312, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, this means that the first opening process of the electric accessory 307 in the second high winning support state has been completed, so in step S1314 the second time Is set to “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer area T2.

  In the subsequent step S1315, the ordinary figure closing command is set, and the main article opening / closing process is ended. The set general map closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received ordinary map closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1313 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, a support state end process is executed in step S1316. In this process, a waiting time for the usual ending for waiting for the ending in the support state without starting the next ordinary figure game round is set. More specifically, standby time information for normal ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a counter area for normal time for standby provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The waiting time for the usual ending is set to 1.0 sec for the first high winning support state (see FIG. 16B), and 0.2 sec for the second high winning support state and the low winning support state. It is set (see FIGS. 16B and 16C).

  Thereafter, in step S1317, a normal ending command is set, and then the main article opening / closing process is terminated. The set ordinary ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The usual ending command includes information on the first high-winning support state and waiting time information for the usual ending set in step S1316. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received ordinary ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

  Returning to the description of the normal game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the accessory opening / closing process in step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. In step S1213, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1214, a support state end process is executed. In the support status end processing, various support status flags such as a first high-winning support flag, a second high-winning support flag, and a low-winning support flag are deleted. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<Electric Configurations of Effect Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, a configuration for performing various effects will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) such as a special figure shift command is received. Also, a special figure game time control command (first game time control information) such as a special figure change command, a special figure type command, and a special figure change end command is received. In addition, an open / close execution mode command (first state transition information) such as a special figure opening command and a special figure ending command is received. Further, a general game game control command (second game game control information) such as a general game change command, a general game type command, and a general game change end command is received. Also, a support state command (second state transition information) such as a first high winning support command, a general opening command, and a general ending command is received.

  In the ROM 243, various table storage areas 245 for storing various tables used for executing various control processes received from the main control device 81 are set. The RAM 244 receives various address storage areas 246 used for storing address information for various effects, various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, and received from the main control device 81. The command storage area 248 for temporarily storing the command, the various counter areas 249 used for executing various control processes, and the hold information on the special map side and the general information based on the commands from the main control device 81 A holding storage area 250 for storing holding information on the drawing side is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored commands.

  The storage area for holding 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 and the electric role holding area 233 in the main control device 81. As shown in FIG. 32, the storage area for holding 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main controller 81 side, and the first sub-side holding area 250a, the second sub-side holding area 250b, and the first sub-side. And an execution area SAE1. The first secondary reservation area 250a corresponds to the first result display area reservation area Ra on the main controller 81 side, and the second secondary storage area 250b corresponds to the second result display area reservation area Rb. The first secondary execution area SAE1 corresponds to the first execution area AE1. And the 1st subside reservation area 250a and the 2nd subside reservation area 250b have four storage areas, a 1st area, a 2nd area, a 3rd area, and a 4th area, respectively. Each area is set so as to be able to store information included in the command related to the hold information on the special drawing side received from the main control device 81 side.

  In addition, the storage area for holding 250 includes a sub-side power-holding area 250c and a second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponding to the power-holding area 233 on the main control device 81 side. The sub-side power role reservation area 250c corresponds to the power role reservation area Rc, and the second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponds to the second execution area AE2. The sub-side electric power reservation area 250c has four storage areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively. Each area is set so as to be able to store information included in a command related to the hold information on the normal side received from the main control device 81 side.

  As shown in FIG. 31, on the output side of the MPU 242, as already explained, each of the on-hold light emitting units 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36, the display light emitting unit 63 provided on the front door frame 14, and the winning a prize. A light emitting substrate 359 provided in the unit 301 and a speaker unit 64 are connected, and a display control device 212 is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Yes.

  The MPU 252 receives, from the effect control device 82, a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) for performing the special figure hold display control, and a special figure for performing the variable display of the special figure side symbol. It receives a command for controlling game times (first game time control information), a command for opening / closing execution mode (first state transition information) for displaying a moving image during the opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In addition, a command for controlling a general game game (second game time control information) for displaying a variation of the symbol on the normal map side, a command for performing an effect during the support state (second state transition information), etc. Receive. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<About processing related to special effects on the special drawing side>
Processing related to various effects on the special figure side will be described. As the process related to the special drawing side effect, the variable display control process is mainly set.

<Variable display control process performed by the production control device 82>
The special figure side variable display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  The variable display control process is started every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). In the variation display control process, when the special diagram variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbols for one game, and the main control device When the special figure change end command transmitted from 81 is received, a process for displaying the change display of the symbol at the final stop is executed.

  In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, whether or not a special figure game is being played in step S1501, that is, whether or not the symbol display for one game is being displayed on the symbol display device 41. Determine whether or not. If the symbol variation display for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not a special diagram variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the special figure variation command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. If a special figure change command has been received, the special figure change start process is executed in step S1503, and then the fluctuation display control process ends. Here, the special figure variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, the special figure change command received this time is read out, and information on presence / absence of reach and change display time information are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main controller 81 transmits a special figure change command, it also transmits a special figure type command. Therefore, in step S1601, the special figure type command received together with the special figure variation command received this time is read out, and information on the probability variation jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result and 15R probability variation jackpot result), normal jackpot result is read from the command. Information (6R normal jackpot result) is specified. In step S1601, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time And the obtained information is stored in the first secondary execution area SAE1 in the storage area for holding 250 of the RAM 244.

  In the subsequent step S1602, it is determined based on the information grasped in step S1601 whether or not the game result of the special figure game times started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result, then in step S1603, a jackpot effect setting process is executed.

  In the jackpot effect setting process, a jackpot stop result determination process is executed. Specifically, in the case of 6R probability variation jackpot or 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 As a result of stopping. If the result is a 6R normal jackpot result, a stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (the main symbol with an even number) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. . Further, in the jackpot effect setting process, a process for setting a jackpot effect pattern such as normal reach or super reach is executed with reference to the variation display time of the game times executed this time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1602 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1604, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If reach occurs, the process advances to step S1605 to execute effect setting processing for reach generation.

  In the effect setting process for reach generation, a stop result determination process for outreach is executed. Specifically, a stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the effect setting process for generating reach, a process for setting an effect pattern for outreach such as normal reach or super reach is executed with reference to the variation display time of the game times executed this time.

  If no reach has occurred in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1606, where the effect setting process for normal removal is executed. In the normal setting effect setting process, a stop result determination process for non-reach is executed. In this process, the current stop result is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the outreach reach symbols is not stopped. Further, in the normal out effect setting process, a process of setting a normal out effect pattern with no reach is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S1603, step S1605 or step S1606, in step S1607, the command including the determined stop result and information on the effect pattern is output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Execute the process. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control for executing an effect in the current special figure game times on the symbol display device 41.

  In the subsequent step S1608, after executing the process of starting the effect for special figure game times, this special figure variation start process is terminated. Specifically, drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 is started based on the determined effect pattern, and an effect for special figure game times is started.

  Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 33), if the special figure game is not being played in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1504, and whether a special figure change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received or not. Determine whether. If the special figure change end command has not been received, the special figure change middle process is executed in step S1505, and then the fluctuation display control process is ended. In the special figure change middle process, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the special figure game times are executed with the effect content determined in the special figure fluctuation start process. On the other hand, when the special figure change end command is received in step S1504, the special figure change end process is executed in step S1506, and then the fluctuation display control process is ended. In the special figure variation end process, as a process for ending the special figure game times, the variable display is terminated to notify the game result of the special figure game times, and various flags and counters used in the special figure game times are set. Execute the clear process.

<Regarding the processing related to various effects on the ordinary map>
Next, processing related to various effects on the normal map side will be described. The processes related to various effects on the normal map side are broadly classified into a general map fluctuation display control process related to the effect control of the general game game times and a support state process related to the effect control for the support state. These processes are started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

<Normal map display control processing>
First, the common map display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. In the common figure variation display control process, when the common figure variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the common symbols for one game, When the universal symbol change end command transmitted from the control device 81 is received, a process of finally stopping and displaying the normal symbol variation display is executed.

  In the common figure variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, whether or not the common figure game is being played in step S1701, that is, the fluctuation display of the common figure for one game time is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Determine if it is running. If the fluctuation display of the usual symbols for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the usual figure changing command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the command for changing the normal map is not received, the normal map change display control process is terminated. If the command for changing the normal map has been received, the process for starting the normal map change is executed in step S1703, and then the normal map change display control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the change display of the normal symbols for one game is performed, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the normal change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the universal change end command has not been received, the normal change processing is executed in step S1705, and then the normal change display control process is ended. If the common figure change end command is received in step S1704, the normal figure change end processing is executed in step S1706, and then the normal figure change display control process is ended. In the process for ending the general-purpose game, the process for ending the general-purpose game times is ended to display the game results of the general-purpose game times, and various flags and counters used in the general-purpose game times are displayed. Execute the clear process.

<Usual change start processing>
The process for starting the usual figure change is a process for starting the effect for the usual figure game times based on the reception of the command for changing the usual figure transmitted from the main control device 81. Here, prior to the description of the usual figure change start process, the contents of the effect of the usual figure game times will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  As already described, the fluctuation display of the general game game times on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display units in the general graphic display area P. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), when the general game play is started from the situation where the display colors of the two display units are displayed in the same or substantially the same first display color (for example, white), As shown in FIG. 36 (a2), the display color of one display unit is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) that is different from the previous color (in the figure, the difference in color of the display unit is hatched). Are displayed differently). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (a3), the color of the display unit on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display unit is set to the first display color. The display color is switched to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 36 (a4), the color of each display unit is switched again. Basic figure game times change display is basically repeated switching of the display color of these two display parts (Fig. 36 (a2) → Fig. 36 (a3) → Fig. 36 (a4) → Fig. 36 (a2) Repeated). The switching of the display color is set so as to make one round in about 0.5 sec, and it is difficult for the player to identify each display before and after the switching.

  When the fluctuation display time of the usual figure game times elapses, the game result of the usual figure game times is notified as to whether the result is an opening result or a disengagement result. In the case of the release result, as shown in FIG. 36 (a5), both of the two display units become the second display color, and the variable display is terminated. In the case of the release result, the display result is shown in FIG. 36 (a1). As shown in the figure, both of the two display units are changed to the first display color, and the variable display ends. In other words, the variation display mode and the game result notification mode (variation display stop result) in the general game times have a simple configuration compared to the special game game side.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36 (b), in the processing for starting to change the normal map in the present embodiment, first, in step S1801, the command for changing the normal map received this time is read, and the change display is performed from the command. Identify time information. Further, as already described, when the main control device 81 transmits a general map change command, it also transmits a general map type command. Therefore, in step S1801, the common figure type command received together with the currently received common figure change command is read, and game result information (release result or outlier result) is specified from the command. In step S1801, the information indicating whether or not the release result and the variable display time information are grasped from the identified information, and the grasped information is stored in the second secondary execution area SAE2 in the storage area 250 for holding in the RAM 244. Remember.

  In the subsequent step S1802, based on the information grasped in step S1801, a process of setting a stop result in the general game game started this time is executed. That is, if the information specified in step S1801 is the release result, the stop result is displayed so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color at the end of the variable display in the current general game game times. If the information specified in step S1801 is an outlier result, the two display units are stopped and displayed in the first display color at the end of the variable display in the current general game game times. Set the stop result.

  In step S1803, a process for outputting a command to the display control device 212 is executed so as to start an effect for the usual game play, and then the process for starting the usual figure change is terminated. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control for executing an effect in the current general game game times on the symbol display device 41. Note that, as described above, the general game game times only switch the display colors of the two display units in the general map display area P, so that the display control device 212 has received the command. Based on this, display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to periodically perform display switching of the display color of the display unit.

<Processing for normal changes>
In the normal variation processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the general diagram game times are executed with the contents determined in the general variation start processing. Further, in the normal change processing, when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to be opened and closed in the first high winning support state, the special light emission effect is provided in the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 of the winning unit 301. The light emitting substrate 359 is controlled to be executed. This special light emission effect is executed prior to the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307, and suggests to the player that the electric accessory 307 performs the opening / closing control in the first high winning support state. . Here, the content of the special light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  Before the start of the special light emission effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (a1), both the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are controlled to be turned off. Then, when the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is successful is a result of shifting to the first high winning support state, after the start of the variable display in the general figure game times, at the end of the variable display (timing t3 in FIG. 37B) At the timing 3 seconds before the timing (timing t1), the light emission modes of the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are switched so as to start the special light emission effect.

  In the special light emission effect, first, as shown in FIG. 37 (a2), the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are switched to the first light emission state A2 in which white light is emitted. The first light emission state A2 is executed so that the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 start to emit light simultaneously, and is continued for 1 sec from the start of the light emission. During execution of the first light emission state, each of the light emitting units 311 and 317 is controlled to maintain white light emission.

  At timing t2 after 1 sec from the start of the first light emission state A2, as shown in FIG. 37 (a3), the second and third light emission portions 311 and 317 gradually change to red light. The light emission state is switched to A3. The second light emission state A3 is continued for 2 seconds from the timing t2. That is, the second light emission state A3 is performed so that switching to red light emission is completed 2 seconds after the start.

  During execution of the second light emitting state A3, the lighting state of each light emitting body 360 is controlled so that the first light emitting unit 311 emits light continuously while the second light emitting unit 317 blinks. This is because, in a front view from the front of the gaming machine, the first light emitting unit 311 flows in front of the game ball, while the second light emitting unit 317 does not overlap with the flowing area of the game ball (see FIG. 8). Thus, the light emission modes of both are made different. In other words, the first light emitting unit 311 emphasizes the visibility of the game ball to provide a light emitting effect that does not involve a drastic change in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting unit 317 makes it easy to attract the player's attention by blinking. In order to further improve the visibility of the game ball in the first light emitting unit 311, the light emission intensity (light emission luminance) of the first light emitting unit 311 may be lower than that of the second light emitting unit 317.

  After timing t3 after 2 seconds from the start of the second light emitting state A3, as shown in FIG. 37 (a4), the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 continue the third light emitting state A4 in which red light is emitted. Even during execution of the third light emitting state A4, the first light emitting unit 311 is controlled to continuously emit light and the second light emitting unit 317 is controlled to blink as in the second light emitting state A3. This third light emission state A4 is continued until the end of the special light emission effect. The special light emission effect ends with the switching of the electric accessory 307 from the open state to the closed state.

  Incidentally, the special light effect is not performed when the electric accessory 307 is opened / closed in the low winning support state and the second high winning support state, and is opened / closed in the first high winning support state. This is a dedicated production.

  Next, the processing for changing the ordinary map executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. Here, the control process related to the special light emission effect will be mainly described.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a special light emission effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The special light emission flag is stored when the special light emission effect is started, and is deleted when the special light emission effect ends.

  If the special light emission effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the first high winning support command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the first high prize winning support command has not been received, the in-fluctuation process is terminated.

  If the first high winning support command has been received, it is determined in step S1903 whether it is the execution timing of the special light emission effect. Specifically, based on the command for fluctuation of the usual figure transmitted from the main control device 81, whether or not the remaining fluctuation display time of the game time is 3 seconds after grasping the fluctuation display time of the current figure game time. Determine whether or not. If it is not the execution timing of the special light emission effect, the in-fluctuation process ends.

  If it is the execution timing of the special light emission effect, the execution process of the first light emission state A2 is performed in step S1904, and the light emission modes of the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are switched to the first light emission state A2. In the next step S1905, a special light emission flag is set in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244, and then in step S1906, a first light emission flag is set in the flag storage area 247. The first light emission flag is a flag indicating that the first light emission state A2 is being executed. Next, in step S1907, “500” (that is, 1 sec) is set in the timer area ST provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 244, and the process during the change is terminated. The value set in step S1907 is decremented by 1 every time the ordinary map display control process (FIG. 35) is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the special light emission effect is being executed, the process advances to step S1908 to determine whether the first light emission state A2 is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the first light emission state A2 is being executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether the value of the timer area ST is “0”, that is, whether the execution period of the first light emission state A2 has elapsed. judge. When the value of the timer area ST is not “0”, the process during the change is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the timer area ST is “0”, the execution process of the second light emission state A3 is performed in step S1910, and the light emission modes of the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are changed to the second light emission state. Switch to A3. In step S1910, the first light emission flag stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is erased. In the subsequent step S1911, the second light emission flag is set in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The second light emission flag is a flag indicating that the second light emission state A3 is being executed. Next, in step S1912, "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the timer area ST, and the process during change is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1908 that the first light emission state A2 is not being executed, the process advances to step S1913 to determine whether the second light emission state A3 is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second light emission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the second light emission state A3 is being executed, it is determined in step S1914 whether or not the value of the timer area ST is “0”, that is, whether or not the execution period of the second light emission state A3 has elapsed. judge. When the value of the timer area ST is not “0”, the process during the change is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the timer area ST is “0”, in step S1915, the execution process of the third light emission state A4 is performed, and the light emission modes of the first and second light emission units 311 and 317 are changed to the third light emission state. Switch to A4. In step S1915, the second light emission flag stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is erased. Thereafter, the process during the change is terminated.

  If the second light emission state A3 is not being executed in step S1913, it means that the third light emission state A4 is being executed. Therefore, in order to continue the third light emission state A4, the process during the change is terminated as it is. To do.

<Support status processing>
Next, the support state process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the support state processing, and FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects during the support state.

  In the support state process, a process for performing an effect during the support state in the symbol display device 41 based on a support state command such as a general opening command or a general ending command transmitted from the main control device 81 is performed. Run.

  That is, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the usual game game is being executed. When the ordinary game game is being executed, the support state process is terminated as it is. In this process, in the above-mentioned usual figure fluctuation display control process, the figure game start is being executed from the execution of the usual figure fluctuation start process to the end of the usual figure fluctuation end process. Specifically, the variable display is started in the general-purpose display area P in the accessory display 44 on the main control device 81 side and the symbol display device 41, and the variable display is ended, and the result of the lottery determination on the general-purpose side is displayed. It is determined that the usual game game is being executed until the stop result is notified. For this determination, for example, in the process of starting the effect for the general game play in step S1803 of the process for starting the normal fluctuation (FIG. 36B), the normal execution is executed in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Stores the middle flag. Then, when the confirmation display is executed in the process for ending the normal map change (when the variable display is ended), the normal chart execution flag is deleted, and whether or not the flag is stored in step S2001 is determined. It is preferable that the determination is made.

  If the usual game times are not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous ordinary game times is a result corresponding to the transition to the support state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous ordinary game game was an open result. If the result is not the release result but the release result, the support state process is terminated as it is. If it is a release result, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes according to the game state by the side of a special figure also in the effect in this support state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the production | presentation in a support state differs according to each release result of the normal figure side, and the presentation result in a support state may differ by the release result selected depending on the game state of a special figure side. . In this way, it is possible to suitably notify the support state according to the state on the special figure side.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the opening control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed as a result of shifting to the support state. If it is determined that the opening / closing control is not being executed, that is, if the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is not currently being executed even if the game result of the previous ordinary game game is the opening result, the process proceeds to step S2004. move on. The case where the process proceeds to step S2004 is a standby time before the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307, that is, the opening period (OP period) or after the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed, The waiting time until the start of the game round, that is, the ending period (ED period), or the situation where the hold information on the usual figure side that triggers the usual figure game round is not acquired can be considered. In the present embodiment, a dedicated effect is set when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to be opened and closed in the first prize winning support state. In the following steps S2004 to S2009, the dedicated effect is set to the OP period or ED. Processing to be performed during the period is executed.

  In step S2004, it is determined whether or not a general opening command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the usual opening command has been received, it is determined in step S2005 whether the first high winning support command from the main controller 81 has been received. When the ordinary opening command and the first high winning support command are received, it means that the electric accessory 307 is in the OP period immediately before the opening / closing control is performed in the first high winning support state. Then, the process for performing the special display effect B1 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is executed.

  In order to notify the player that the special display effect B1 is a situation where the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is performed in the first high winning support state, that is, the situation where it is easy to acquire the chance to win the second special drawing. belongs to. As this special display effect B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (a1), in the lower center of the display screen G in the symbol display device 41, a character display 381 such as “Aim for Electric Chu!” Or the display screen G For example, a configuration may be considered in which the background color is changed to a dedicated color different from the previous background color.

  “Electric Chu” is an abbreviation for electric tulip, in other words, a common name for the electric accessory 307 and the upper working port 303. The display 381 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen G in correspondence with the fact that the electric accessory 307 and the upper working port 303 are located below the center of the display screen G. Are displayed in a region near the electric accessory 307 and the upper working port 303.

  In step S2006 of FIG. 39, a command including information on the content of the special display effect B1 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special display effect B1 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

  If it is determined in step S2004 that the usual opening command has not been received, if it is determined in step S2005 that the first high winning support command has not been received, or after executing the process of step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. . In step S2007, it is determined whether or not an ordinary ending command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the usual ending command has been received, it is determined in step S2008 whether or not the first high winning support command from the main control device 81 has been received. If the normal ending command and the first high winning support command have been received, it means that the electric accessory 307 is in the ED period immediately after the opening / closing control is performed in the first high winning support state. The process for performing the special ending effect B2 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is executed.

  The special ending effect B2 is for informing the player that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 in the first high-winning support state has been completed, that is, the situation where the special figure side is easily acquired is completed. Is. In the special ending effect B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (a2), in the lower center of the display screen G in the symbol display device 41, the character display 382 such as “End of help” and the background color on the display screen G are displayed. A configuration may be considered in which the normal color before the execution of the special display effect B1 is restored, or the color is changed to a ending color different from the background color or the normal color during the execution of the special display effect B1.

  In step S2009 of FIG. 39, a command including information on the content of the special ending effect B2 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special ending effect B2 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

  After execution of step S2009, a special light emission effect (FIG. 37 (a)) end process is executed in step S2010. In this step, the light emitting substrate 359 is controlled so that the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are turned off, and the special light emission flags stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 are erased.

  On the other hand, if the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2011, and the support state process ends after performing the support state process. In the support state process in step S2011, a process for continuing the special display effect started with the start of the OP period is executed.

  Note that the special display effect B1 and the special ending effect B2 are not performed when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the low winning support state and the second high winning support state, and the first high winning support. It is an exclusive production of the state.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to be opened and closed in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs at the timing t11, the passing of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor. The start of the variable display of the figure game times is executed. This variable display is continued for 20 seconds and is performed until timing t13.

  In the case where the result of the above-mentioned lottery win / fail lottery result is the result of shifting to the first high-winning support state, at timing t12 after the start of fluctuation, the special light emission effects by the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 of the winning unit 301 Be started. This special light emission effect is to suggest to the player that the opening / closing control of the first prize winning support state is executed by the electric accessory 307. As described above, the special light emission effect is started 3 seconds before the timing t13 when the fluctuation display of the ordinary game times ends, and then the light emission mode is sequentially switched from the first light emission state A2 to the third light emission state A4. (See FIG. 37).

  When the fluctuation display of the common game game times is finished at the timing t13, the OP period in the first high winning support state is started and the special display effect B1 is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. This special display effect B1 is for informing the player that it is easy to acquire the success / failure lottery opportunity of the second special figure. Specifically, on the display screen G, “Aim for Electric Chu” ! ”Is displayed (see FIG. 40).

  When the opening period ends at timing t <b> 14, the electric accessory 307 is switched from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball can easily win a prize at the upper operating port 303.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning to the upper operating port 303 is higher than the lower operating port 305, and the probability of generating a 15R jackpot when the big hit is won is higher. The upper operating port 303 is more advantageous to the player than the port 305. For this reason, the player strongly desires that the game ball wins the upper working port 303.

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory 307 is in a closed state, it is difficult to win the upper working port 303, and the game ball winning opportunities to the upper working port 303 are very limited. ing. That is, in the gaming state in which the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the low-frequency support mode, even if the result of the lottery on the normal drawing side is the result of shifting to the support state, the majority is the open / close control in the low winning support state. Therefore, the expectation of a permanent winning in the upper working port 303 is limited to the period when the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. In particular, since the high-frequency support mode can only occur when the special drawing side winning / losing lottery result is a big win, for a player who has never won a big win, there is an opportunity to win a game ball at the upper operating port 303. It is almost equal to nothing.

  For this reason, the first high-winning support state that occurs in the low-frequency support mode is a valuable opportunity for the player to expect winning in the upper operating port 303, and during the period when the opening / closing control is performed, It is anxious for as many game balls as possible to win the upper working port 303. Moreover, since the frequency of occurrence of the first high-winning support state in the low-frequency support mode is low, the player's desire to make effective use of this state becomes stronger.

  In such a situation, depending on the positional relationship between the variable operating port provided with the electric accessory and the non-variable operating port not provided with the electric accessory, The ball may not reach the variable operation port by winning the non-variable operation port. That is, in spite of being in the open state, the non-variable operating port loses the chance to win the movable operating port, and there may be a disadvantage that the player cannot fully enjoy the profits due to the opening of the electric accessory.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the electric accessory 307 is disposed above (upstream) the lower operation port 305 and the electric accessory 307 is opened, the acceptance is made. The region RA is configured to be formed on the first flow path R1 (the flow path of the game ball to the lower operation port 305). For this reason, the game ball flowing down toward the lower operation port 305 reaches the receiving area RA before reaching the lower operation port 305, and the lower operation port 305 is prevented from inhibiting the reception of the game ball. . Thereby, the winning opportunity to the upper operating port 303 is stably ensured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit due to the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

  In addition, when the electric accessory 307 is in a closed state, the game ball can flow down in front of the electric accessory 307 (opening / closing member 331), so that the game to the lower operation port 305 is performed by the electric accessory 307. The flow of the sphere is not obstructed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 41, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state at the timing t14, the first game ball wins the upper operation port 303 at the timing t15 immediately after that, and accordingly, the second result. The display of the game time variation of the second special figure is started on the display unit BS. While the upper limit period of the open state is set for 3 seconds until timing t18, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so that four game balls are successively won following the first game ball. (Timing t16 to timing t17), a total of five game balls win. As the second and subsequent game balls are won, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure increases in order, and the number of reserved memories becomes four when the fifth game ball is won.

  Here, the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is set to four, and even if there is a prize for the upper working port 303 exceeding that, the winning is linked to the lottery of the second special figure. It will not be attached. In other words, winnings that exceed the upper limit of the number of reserved memories will be invalid when viewed in relation to the winning lottery.

  In this regard, the open state of the first high-winning support state is configured to end on the condition that 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the open state or the number of winnings to the upper working port 303 reaches five. Yes. This makes it possible to win a total of five game balls, one corresponding to the display of the fluctuation of the game times of the first second special figure and four until the reserved memory number of the second special figure reaches the upper limit. However, the number of winnings may not exceed that. In other words, it is possible to make the above-described invalid winning is less likely to occur while the number of reserved memories is the maximum number, and the player can effectively utilize the opening / closing of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state.

  In particular, since the winning unit 301 is configured such that winning to the upper operating port 303 is not easily blocked by the lower operating port 305, the upper limit number of winnings to the upper operating port 303 and the upper limit opening period of the electric accessory 307 are set as described above. It is possible to increase the significance of such a definition. That is, when the electric accessory 307 is opened, an event such that the number of winning game balls to the upper working port 303 does not reach 5 even if 3 sec which is the upper limit of the opening period elapses from the start. It is suppressed, and the player can use the opportunity to open the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state more effectively.

  When the fifth game ball wins at the timing t17, the winning combination reaches the upper limit, so that the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. Thereafter, an ending effect is performed until timing t19 (see FIG. 40).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The upper working port 303 provided with the electric accessory 307 is disposed above the lower working port 305, and when the electric accessory 307 is opened, the receiving area RA is formed on the first flow down path R1. Configured. As a result, the player can properly enjoy the profit due to the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

  A second guide portion 371 is provided on the front surface 331 b of the opening / closing member 331, and the game ball is guided to the lower operation port 305 in front of the opening / closing member 331 by the second guide portion 371. Thereby, the front area of the opening / closing member 331 can be utilized as a guide area. In this case, compared with a configuration in which the game ball only flows down in front of the opening / closing door, the flow mode of the game ball can be stabilized, and the game ball can be guided to the lower operation port 305 better.

  The first light emitting unit 311 is adjacently disposed above the electric accessory 307, and the game ball can flow down in front of the first light emitting unit 311. In addition, the first light emitting unit 311 is configured to execute a special light emission effect before the occurrence of the first prize winning support state (before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state).

  When the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball wins the upper operating port 303, the attention points of the player are collected by the proximity of the electric accessory 307 and the first light emitting unit 311. Can do. Thereby, while visually recognizing the special light emission effect, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game ball has won the upper operation port 303, and the attention degree to each of the special light emission effect and the electric accessory 307 is effective. It becomes possible to increase to.

  Furthermore, since the special light emission effect is started before the occurrence of the first high-winning support state, the player can predict the occurrence of the support state in advance. Thereby, not only can the player be provided with a preparation period for aiming at the electric accessory 307 (upper operating port 303), but whether or not the game ball passing in front of the first light emitting unit 311 wins the upper operating port 303 is determined. It is possible to provide a game for enjoying the game.

  In addition, since the first light emitting unit 311 is provided on the flow path (first to third flow paths R1 to R3) of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, the flow path is not only used as the flow area of the game ball, It can also be used as a notification area. In this case, compared to a configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are different from each other, it is easy to secure a large flow-down area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

  The width of the first light emitting unit 311 (translucent unit 341) is set to a size corresponding to a plurality of game balls, and a plurality of flow paths are formed on the first light emitting unit 311. When a game ball passes in front of the first light emitting unit 311, there is a concern that the visibility of the special light emission effect by the game ball is reduced, but according to this configuration, one downflow path on the first light emitting unit 311 Even if the game ball flows down, the special light emission effect can be visually recognized through the remaining portion. Thereby, it is possible to suitably eliminate the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to grasp the content of the special light emission effect due to the game ball passing in front of the first light emitting unit 311, and to make the flow area and the notification area compatible. A practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  The symbol display device 41, the electric accessory 307, and the first light emitting unit 311 are arranged vertically, and the first light emitting unit 311 is arranged between the symbol display device 41 and the electric accessory 307. According to this configuration, while the player is paying attention to the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the line of sight is moved to the first light emitting unit 311 when the special light emission effect starts, and then the flow of the game ball is followed. The line of sight may be shifted to the electric accessory 307. In other words, the first light emitting unit 311 and the electric accessory 307 can be visually recognized in an appropriate order by the natural line-of-sight movement downward from the display screen G, thereby facilitating the understanding of effects. .

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the top winning portion in the winning unit 301 is different from that of the first embodiment. The top winning portion 401 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the winning unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 42, and FIG. It is a front view. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the top winning portion 401 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the second guide portion 403 that guides the game ball in front of the opening / closing member 331 extends from the rear (back side) of the opening / closing member 331. It is installed. In addition, the opening / closing member 331 is formed with a notch portion 411 into which the second guide portion 403 can be inserted. Hereinafter, this configuration will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, the second guide part 403 is provided on a partition wall 405 that partitions the upper guide passage 333. Specifically, it is integrally formed on the upper wall portion 405a of the partition wall 405, and extends linearly from the upper wall portion 405a to the front (front side) of the opening / closing member 331 toward the front.

  The vertical width of the second guide portion 403 differs between a portion located behind the opening / closing member 331 in the closed position and a portion located in the front. Specifically, the vertical width of the rear portion 403a located behind the opening / closing member 331 is smaller than that of the front portion 403b located in front, and the height position of the lower end of the rear portion 403a is larger than that of the front portion 403b. It is high. Thereby, a space having a height larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the upper guide passage 333 and the passage bottom surface 333a. This is to allow the game ball to move smoothly through the upper guide passage 333.

  The upper guide passage 333 is configured to gather the game balls that have entered the upper guide passage 333 in one place so that the game balls won in the upper operation port 303 can be detected one by one. That is, the rear wall 405b of the partition wall 405 is provided with an opening 407 (see FIG. 42) having a size that allows one game ball to pass therethrough, and the game ball that has passed through the opening 407 is detected by the detection sensor. It is set as the structure detected by. For this reason, the passage bottom surface 333a is inclined so as to guide the game ball of the upper guide passage 333 to the opening 407, and the game ball that has entered the upper guide passage 333 crosses the passage bottom surface 333a along the inclination. Will move in the direction.

  By setting the vertical width of the rear portion 403a as described above, the game ball can smoothly move in the upper guide passage 333, and the stagnation of the game ball in the upper guide passage 333 is suppressed. Thereby, the game balls in the upper guide passage 333 eliminate the inconveniences such as preventing the winning of the succeeding game balls into the operation port 303 and inhibiting the displacement of the opening / closing member 331 to the closed position. .

  On the other hand, the vertical width of the front portion 403b of the second guide portion 403 is the same as that of the second guide portion 371 according to the first embodiment. That is, the distance L6 to the first guide portion 365 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance L7 to the lower operation port case 337 (the lower operation port 305) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. .

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, a vertically long notch 411 is formed at the upper edge of the opening / closing member 331 corresponding to the second guide portion 403. The second guide part 403 can be inserted into the cutout part 411 in a state where at least the opening / closing member 331 is located at the closed position. Accordingly, interference between the opening / closing member 331 and the second guide portion 403 is avoided, and the opening / closing member 331 can be rotated.

  Here, in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, only the opening / closing member 331 is displaced, and the second guide portion 403 is not moved. . That is, the position of the second guide part 403 is fixed. For this reason, the 2nd guide part 403 can be extended in the range which does not contact | abut to the window panel 62, and the distance L8 with the window panel 62 can be simply made smaller than the diameter of a game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing in front of the second guide portion 403, and it is possible to suitably guide the game ball.

  Also in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the electric accessory 307 is in a closed state, the game balls on the first flow path R1 are the first guide portion 365 and the second guide. When it is guided to the lower operation port 305 by the unit 403 and the electric accessory 307 is in an open state, the game balls on the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3 can win the upper operation port 303. Therefore, the same effect as the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
In this modification, the configuration of the second guide portion is different from that of the second embodiment. The second guide portion 451 of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the second guide portion 451, and is a cross-sectional view corresponding to a cross section taken along the line CC of FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to the said 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the second guide portion 451 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 46A, in front of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position, the second guiding portion 451 is opposed to the front surface 331b so as to be separated from the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331. An opposing portion 453 is provided. Specifically, the second guide portion 451 is configured to extend from the rear to the front of the opening / closing member 331 with the vertical width of the second guide portion 451 being narrow, and to increase in width toward the front in front of the opening / closing member 331. Yes.

  The edge portion 453a of the facing portion 453 is formed in a curved shape in a side view (in the axial direction of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 331), and specifically, is formed in an arc shape protruding forward. The curvature of the edge portion 453a corresponds to the curvature of the turning locus of the opening / closing member 331, and specifically, is substantially the same as the curvature of the locus PT of one point J on the bottom surface 411a of the notch portion 411. In this case, the opening / closing member 331 can be rotated while maintaining a substantially constant gap with the second guide portion 451.

  With such a configuration, the size (vertical dimension) of the notch 411 can be reduced in suppressing interference between the opening / closing member 331 and the second guide portion 451. As a result, it is possible to suitably guide the game ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing member 331 while suppressing a decrease in rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member 331 due to the notch 411.

  In the modified example, as shown in FIG. 46B, the edge portion 453a of the facing portion 453 may be linear. Also in this case, the notch 411 can be made smaller than the configuration of the second embodiment, and the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member 331 can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the top winning portion in the winning unit 301 is different from that of the first embodiment. The top winning portion 501 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the winning unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 49 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the top winning portion 501 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the second guide portion 503 for guiding the game ball in front of the opening / closing member 511 extends from the rear (back side) of the opening / closing member 511. It is installed. In addition, in the opening / closing member 511, a through hole 517 through which the second guide portion 503 can be inserted is formed. Hereinafter, this configuration will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the second guide portion 503 is provided on a partition wall 405 that partitions the upper guide passage 333. Specifically, it is integrally formed on the upper wall portion 405a of the partition wall 405, and extends linearly from the upper wall portion 405a to the front (front side) of the opening / closing member 331 toward the front.

  The distance between the second guide portion 503 and the first guide portion 365 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the second guide portion 503 and the lower working port case 337 (the lower working port 305) is the diameter of the game ball. Is bigger than. Further, the distance between the second guide portion 503 and the window panel 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  In the second guide portion 503, the height position of the lower end of the rear portion 503a is higher than that of the front portion 503b in the upper guide passage 333 as in the second embodiment. This is to facilitate the movement of the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the opening / closing member 511 includes a standing wall-shaped front wall portion 513 and an extending portion 515 extending rearward from the back surface of the front wall portion 513. The front wall portion 513 and the extending portion 515 are integrally formed, and the opening / closing member 511 has a substantially L-shaped longitudinal section.

  The opening / closing member 511 is held by the base body 320 in a state where linear movement in the front-rear direction is possible, and is configured to open and close the upper operation port 303 by moving back and forth. That is, the projection from the front surface of the game board 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321) is suppressed and the upper operation port 303 is covered, and the upper operation port is projected forward from the front surface 321a of the game board 24 (plate-shaped base portion 321). It can be displaced to an open position where 303 is opened. The upper surface of the extending portion 515, that is, the ball receiving surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and the game ball entering the opening / closing member 511 is guided rearward.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a through hole 517 is formed in the front wall portion 513 corresponding to the second guide portion 403. The second guide portion 503 can be inserted into the through hole 517. Thereby, the interference between the opening / closing member 511 and the second guide portion 503 is avoided, and the opening / closing member 511 can be moved back and forth.

  By the way, in the configuration in which the second guide portion 503 is inserted through the through hole of the opening / closing member, if the opening / closing member is displaced between the open position and the closed position by rotation, the interference between the second guide portion 503 and the opening / closing member. In order to avoid this, it is necessary to enlarge the through hole, and there is a concern that the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member may be reduced. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 511 is displaced between the open position and the closed position by linear movement in the front-rear direction, enlargement of the through-hole 517 is suppressed, and the above-described inconvenience is preferably eliminated. Is possible.

  Incidentally, when the upper working port 303 is opened and closed by linear movement in the front-rear direction, a configuration in which the front wall portion 513 is not provided in the opening and closing member 511 may be considered. However, in the configuration in which the second guide portion 503 is positioned in front of the upper operation port 303, the flow direction of the game ball changes due to the contact with the second guide portion 503, and the game ball moves up despite being in the closed state. It is assumed that it jumps into the working port 303. According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the opening / closing member 511 is located at the closed position, the upper working port 303 is covered by the front wall portion 513, so that the unexpected winning due to the jump is suppressed. The

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49, the front surface of the front wall portion 513 is inclined so that the distance from the window panel 62 increases as it goes downward. In this case, when the opening / closing member 511 is displaced from the closed position toward the open position, even if the game ball is sandwiched between the front wall portion 513 and the window panel 62, the game ball can easily escape downward, So-called ball biting is suppressed.

  Also in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the electric accessory 307 is in the closed state, the game balls on the first flow down path R1 are the first guide portion 365 and When the electric guide 307 is guided to the lower operation port 305 by the second guide unit 503 and the electric accessory 307 is in an open state, the game balls on the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3 can win the upper operation port 303. Therefore, the same effect as the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the first guide unit in the winning unit 301 is different from those in the above embodiments. The first guide portion 603 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 is a front view of the winning unit 301, FIG. 51 is a perspective view of the winning unit when viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 50, and FIG. It is a front view. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the winning unit 301 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first guide portion 603 hangs downward from the lower end of the translucent portion 341, and the front of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position. It extends to. In such a configuration, a portion of the first guide portion 603 positioned in front of the opening / closing member 331 serves as the second guide portion in each of the above embodiments.

  In the first guide portion 603, as shown in FIG. 52A, in front of the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position, the facing portion 605 that faces the front surface 331b so as to be separated from the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331. Is provided. The facing portion 605 is formed in a circular arc shape that protrudes forward, like the facing portion 453 in the modification of the second embodiment.

  As shown in the enlarged view, the upper end 605a of the facing portion 605 (in other words, the lower end of the first guide portion 603 on the game board 24 side (the back side of the pachinko machine 10)) has the opening / closing member 331 in the closed position. In the positioned state, it is located above the upper end 331d of the opening / closing member 331. Further, the curvature of the facing portion 605 is substantially the same as the curvature of the locus of one point on the upper end portion 331d of the opening / closing member 331. Thereby, interference with the 1st guide part 603 and the opening / closing member 331 can be suppressed, without providing a notch etc. in the opening / closing member 331. FIG.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to continue the guidance of the game balls above the opening / closing member 331 and in front of the opening / closing member 331, and the game ball that has passed between the first and second game nails 281, 282. Can be suitably guided to the lower working port 305. In addition, since the members for each guide are formed integrally, the strength and rigidity of the guide structure in front of the opening / closing member 331 can be increased. Furthermore, the opening and closing member 331 is not provided with a notch or the like, whereby the strength and rigidity of the opening and closing member 331 can be increased.

  Further, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, only the opening / closing member 331 is displaced, and the first guide portion 603 is not moved. For this reason, the 1st guide part 603 can be extended ahead in the range which does not contact | abut to the window panel 62, and the distance with the window panel 62 can be simply made smaller than the diameter of a game ball. Accordingly, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the first guide portion 603 in front of the opening / closing member 331, and the game ball can be suitably guided.

  Also in the winning unit 301 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, when the electric accessory 307 is in a closed state, the game ball on the first flow down path R1 is moved to the lower operation port 305 by the first guide portion 603. When the electric accessory 307 is guided and opened, the game balls on the first to third flow down paths R1 to R3 can win the upper operating port 303. Therefore, the same effects as those in the above embodiments can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as in the modification of the second embodiment (FIG. 46), the upper end 605a of the facing portion 605 is positioned below the upper end 331d of the opening / closing member 331, and the first The opening / closing member 331 may be provided with an insertion portion (notch or the like) through which the guide portion 603 is inserted. By setting it as such a structure, it becomes easy to enlarge drooping length of the 1st guide part 603. FIG. As a result, the distance between the first guide portion 603 and the lower operation port 305 can be easily reduced, and the guidance of the game ball in front of the opening / closing member 331 can be easily stabilized.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 in the case where the support state is the first high-winning support state is different from the above embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the variation display time of the game time of the second special figure performed in the second result display unit BS is the result of the game special of the second special figure being out of normal (no reach is generated) ) Is set to 7 sec uniformly. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state according to the present embodiment takes into account the variable display time when the game times of the second special figure correspond to the normal losing result. Is set. Hereinafter, the opening pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, in the first high-winning support state, the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed three times from the start to the end of the support state. The first release is performed until 3 sec elapses, and the remaining 2 releases are performed until 1 sec elapses each time. When the number of winnings in the upper operating port 303 has reached 10 since the start of the support state, the support state ends at that point.

  The closing period (first waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening is set to 5.5 sec. That is, the period from the start of the first opening to the start of the second opening (the sum of the opening period of the first opening (3 sec) and the first waiting period (5.5 sec)) is set to 8.5 sec. In addition, it is longer than the variable display time (7 sec) in the case where the game times of the second special figure correspond to the result of the normal losing. Thereby, the change display of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning to the upper working port 303 can be ended before the second opening is started.

  Further, the closing period (second waiting period) between the second opening and the third opening is set to 6.5 sec. That is, the period from the start of the second opening to the start of the third opening (the sum of the opening period of the second opening (1 sec) and the second waiting period (6.5 sec)) is set to 7.5 sec. It is longer than the above-mentioned fluctuation display time (7 sec). Thereby, the change display of the game times of the 2nd special figure corresponding to the 2nd prize to upper operation mouth 303 can be ended before the start of the 3rd opening.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the present embodiment will be described.

<Normal game state transition processing>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a general game state transition process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the present embodiment.

  In the general game state transition process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress in step S1201, as in the general game state transition process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment. If it is not in the support state, the processing of steps S1202 to S1205 is executed. If it is determined in step S1205 that the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high-frequency support mode, “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1207. "Is set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (the low-frequency support mode), the process proceeds to step S2101 to determine whether or not the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high-winning support state. To do.

  If the support state is the first high-winning support state, “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S2012. On the other hand, if the support state is not the first high-winning support state (the low-winning support state), “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S2103.

  After execution of the processing in step S1207, step S2102, or step S2103, the processing in steps S1208 and S1209 is sequentially executed, and this state transition processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S1201 that the player is in the support state, the processes in steps S1210 to S1214 are executed in the same manner as the general game state transition process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment, and thereafter This state transition processing is terminated.

<Functional opening and closing process>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the present embodiment.

  In the accessory opening / closing process according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 is being opened in step S1301, as in the accessory opening / closing process according to the first embodiment (FIG. 29). If it is not open, steps S1302 to S1304 are executed. After the execution of the accessory release process in step S1304, the setting process for each round is executed in step S1305.

  Here, the setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the setting process for each round, as in the setting process for each round (FIG. 30) according to the first embodiment, first, in step S1401, the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not there is. If it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high-winning support state. If it is determined that the state is the first high winning support state, the process proceeds to step S2301, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “3”, that is, whether or not it is the first release. To do. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “3”, “1500” is set in the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S2302, and the upper limit of the first release. 3 sec is set as the period. In the subsequent step S2304, “10” is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, the upper limit of the winning number to the upper operating port 303 is set to ten, and each round The setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “3”, it means that the second or third release. In this case, in step S2305, “500” is set in the second timer area T2, and 1 sec is set as the upper limit of the release period. Thereafter, the setting process for each round is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that the support state of the electric accessory 307 is not the first high winning support state, the upper limit of the open period is set to 0.2 sec in steps S1405 and S1406, and the upper operating port 303 is set. The upper limit of the number of winnings is set to 3 respectively, and the setting process for each round is completed.

  In addition, when the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is high-frequency support in step S1401, it means that the support state is the second high winning support state. Therefore, in steps S1407 to S1409, the second high winning prize is set. In the support state, the upper limit of the opening period of the electric accessory 307 is set to 2 sec, and the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper working port 303 is set to 10, respectively, and the setting process for each round is completed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 56, after the execution of the process of step S2201, the processing for opening and closing the accessory is completed after the process of setting the normal figure release command of step S1306 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 307 is being opened, the processing of steps S1307 to S1312 is performed, and then the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” in step S1313. It is determined whether or not there is. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, in step S2202, whether or not the support mode of the electric accessory 307 is the high-frequency support mode, that is, the support state is the second high winning support state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of the high frequency support mode, “100” is set in the second timer area T2, and 0.2 sec is set as the standby period.

  If the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S2202, it means that the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high-winning support state. Therefore, in step S2204, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “2”. Is determined. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “2”, in step S2205, “2750” is set in the second timer area T2, and the first waiting period (between the first release and the second release). Is set to 5.5 sec. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2204 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “2”, “3250” is set in the second timer area T2 in step S2206, and the second waiting period (second time) 6.5 sec is set as the waiting period between the opening and the third opening.

  After the execution of the process of step S2203, step S2205, or step S2206, the processing for opening and closing the accessory is terminated after executing the setting process of the normal figure closing command in step S1315.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the first special game is not performed during the period from the start of the first opening of the electric accessory 307 to the end of the first high winning support state.

  In FIG. 58, when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs at the timing t21, the passing of the game ball is detected by the detection sensor, and this is used as a trigger for the lottery for the normal drawing and the general game game time on the display 44 for the bonus item. The start of the variable display is executed. This variable display is continued for 20 seconds.

  Although not shown, also in the present embodiment, if the result of the ordinary drawing winning / losing lottery is the result of shifting to the first high winning support state, the winning unit 301 of the winning unit 301 is started 3 seconds before the end of the variable display. A special light emission effect is started in the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 (see FIG. 37 and the like). In addition, a special display effect B1 (such as a character display of “Aim for Electric Chu!”) Is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 from 2 seconds before switching to the open state of the electric accessory 307 ( (See FIG. 40 and the like).

  Thereafter, when the first opening is performed by the electric accessory 307 at the timing t22, the first game ball wins the upper operation port 303 at the timing t23 immediately after that, and accordingly, the second result display portion. The change display of the game times of the second special figure is started at the BS. In this case, when the result of the lottery of the second special figure based on the winning is a result of normal losing, the game times of the second special figure are continued for 7 seconds from the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the upper limit period of the first opening in the electric accessory 307 is set to 3 seconds, while the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so that four games follow the first game ball. Balls win sequentially, and a total of 5 game balls win. With the winning of the second and subsequent game balls, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure (the number of information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display portion of the RAM 204) increases in order, and the number of reserved memories is the fifth. The number of game balls will be 4 when they win.

  When 3 seconds elapse from the opening of the electric accessory 307 at timing t24, the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. This closed state continues until the first waiting period (5.5 sec) elapses.

  On the other hand, at the timing t25, when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the display of the variation of the game times of the second special figure, the variation display of the game times ends, and the stop result is displayed over the stop display period of 0.5 seconds. The When the display of the stop result is finished, at the timing t26, the next game number of the second special figure, that is, the display of the variation of the game number based on the winning of the second game ball to the upper operating port 303 is started. Along with this, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is decreased by 1 to 3, and a margin of 1 is generated with respect to the upper limit number (4).

  Thereafter, the first waiting period elapses at timing t27, and accordingly, the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state again. Since the second opening is continued for 1 sec, one game ball wins the upper operation port 303 at timing t28 while the electric accessory 307 is in the open state. As a result, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure increases by one and reaches the upper limit again.

  Thereafter, at the timing t29, as the variation display of the game times of the second special figure based on the third winning is started, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure decreases by one. Then, at the timing t30, the third release is started, so that one game ball wins again (timing t31), and the storage number of the hold information of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number.

  In FIG. 58, the game time of the second special figure corresponds to the result of normal losing (no reach) and the variation display time is 7 sec. When the number corresponds to the outlier reach result (reach occurrence), the variable display time is longer than that corresponding to the normal outage result, and is set to 12 sec, for example. If the first game ball corresponds to the winning result of the game times corresponding to winning, the game times are ended after the second opening of the electric accessory 307 is completed. For this reason, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is maintained at the upper limit during the second release, and the number of reserved memories in the second special figure even if a winning to the upper operating port 303 occurs in the second release. Cannot be increased. In other words, whether or not the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be increased by the second release differs depending on the game mode selection of the second special figure. By the way, as the game times of the second special figure, the game corresponding to the normal miss result is more easily selected than the game corresponding to the miss reach result.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the first high winning port state, when a game ball is won in the upper operating port 303 while the first electric combination 307 is opened, the second electric combination 307 of the second time after the game corresponding to the winning is completed. It was configured to be opened.

  For example, when a game ball wins the upper operating port 303 at the first opening, if the game times corresponding to the win continues until the end of the first high winning port state, During the period from the start to the end of the first high winning port state, no new free space is generated in the second result display area reservation area Rb (the reservation area of the second special figure) of the RAM 204. For this reason, during the transition to the first high winning port state, it is assumed that the player's interest in winning a prize at the operation port 303 is reduced after the number of reserved figures in the second special figure reaches the upper limit. Furthermore, since a new empty area does not occur in the second result display section reservation area Rb, at most, the execution amount of the lottery of the second special drawing based on the first winning and the number of reservations of the second special drawing There is also a concern that only lottery opportunities corresponding to the total number (5 times) of the upper limit number can be obtained.

  In this regard, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is won in the upper operating port 303 while the first electric accessory 307 is opened, the game corresponding to the win is started before the second opening is started. It is possible to end the game and start the next game game. As a result, the second opening can be started after the vacant area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is increased, and a willingness to win the upper operating port 303 during the second opening is generated. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in winning a prize for the upper operating port 303 throughout the first high winning port state. Further, the number of lottery opportunities exceeding the total of the number of executions of the success / failure lottery of the second special drawing based on the first winning and the upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special drawing can be acquired. As a result, the pleasure of aiming to enter a large number of game balls into the upper operation port 303 during the first high-winning port state is enhanced, and the fun of the first high-winning port state is improved.

  The opening pattern of the first high winning support state in the low frequency support mode is configured as described above. In the high-frequency support mode, the second high-winning support state is likely to be repeated at short intervals. Therefore, even if the number of winning lotteries in the second special drawing is small in the second high-winning support state, the shortage is reduced. The player's psychology that the next second prize winning support state should be compensated works. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the period from the end of the support state to the occurrence of the next support state is likely to be long, and it is difficult to expect the success / failure lottery opportunity to be supplemented. For this reason, unlike the case of the high frequency support mode, there is a strong need to acquire more success / failure lottery opportunities in one support state. In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, a first high winning support state in which one set of three times opening of the electric accessory 307 occurs, which is during the first opening of the electric accessory 307. In addition, when a game ball wins in the upper operating port 303, the second electric combination 307 is opened after the end of the game round corresponding to the win. As a result, it is possible to obtain the lottery chance of the second special figure in the low frequency support mode, and it is possible to effectively enhance the attractiveness of the first high-winning support state.

  The period from the start of the first release to the start of the second release is a period (8 including the fluctuation display time (including the stop display period, 7.5 sec) of the game time of the second special figure corresponding to the normal off result. .5 sec) and the first standby period is set to a period shorter than the variable display time (5.5 sec). In this case, if a game ball wins the upper operating port 303 within 1 sec from the start of the first release, the game times corresponding to the win tend to end before the start of the second open, and wins after 1 sec. In this case, it is difficult for the game times corresponding to the winnings to end before the start of the second opening. That is, the ease of ending the game times before the start of the second opening differs depending on the winning timing at the upper operating port 303. As a result, the pleasure of aiming for a prize is added early in the first opening, and the interest is improved.

  The period of time from the start of the first release to the start of the second release is longer than the fluctuation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal outage result, and the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the outreach reach result The period was shorter than the fluctuation display time. In this case, the ease of completion of the game round before the start of the second release differs depending on whether the game round of the second special figure is selected as the game round corresponding to the normal miss result or the miss reach result. It becomes. As compared with the case where the game times always end before the start of the second release, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

  If the game times of the second special figure correspond to the outlier reach result, it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the reach performance performed on the display screen G. Even if it becomes a situation where there is no space in the number of reserved storages (in other words, even if the significance of winning a game ball in the upper operation port 303 is diminished), it is considered that inconveniences in game effects are unlikely to occur.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the aspect of the special display effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is different from the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a first special display effect S1 shown in FIG. 59A and a second special display effect S2 shown in FIG. 59B are set as the special display effects. The first and second special display effects S1 and S2 are performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to be opened and closed in the first high winning support state.

  The first special display effect S1 is the same as the special display effect (FIG. 40A) of the first embodiment, and in the effect, in the lower center of the display screen G in the symbol display device 41, A predetermined image such as a character display 381 such as “Aim for electric Chu!” Is displayed. On the other hand, the second special display effect S2 is for urging the player to wait or stop the launch of the game ball. In the effect, in the lower center of the display screen G, “Please wait a little” A predetermined image such as a character display 701 is displayed. These first and second special display effects S1 and S2 are in the hold status of the second special figure at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 (the storage status of information in the hold area Rb for the second result display portion of the RAM 204). It is used properly according to the usage.

  Next, an opening pattern of the electric accessory 307 when the support state is the first high-winning support state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the opening pattern of the present embodiment, the number of opening of the electric accessory 307, the upper limit of each opening period, the opening period, and the ending period are the opening pattern of the first high winning support state according to the fifth embodiment ( 54). On the other hand, the closing period (first waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening and the waiting period (second waiting period) between the second opening and the third opening are the same as those in the fifth embodiment. It is different from the case of form. Specifically, each of the first and second standby periods is longer by 2 seconds.

  The relationship between the opening pattern and the special display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  From the start of the opening period at timing t41 to the end of the first release at timing t42, the first special display effect S1 is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state at the timing t42, the execution mode of the special display effect is changed, and the first special display effect S1 is switched to the second special display effect S2.

  At the timing t43 2 sec before the start of the second release, whether or not the second special figure holding status is grasped and switching from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1 is performed according to the grasped result. Then, it is selected whether or not to continue the second special display effect S2. When the switching to the first special display effect S1 is performed, the switching to the second special display effect S2 is performed again with the completion of the second opening at the timing t44.

  At the timing t45 2 seconds before the start of the third opening, as in the above, the holding status of the second special figure is grasped, and from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1 according to the grasping result. It is selected whether to perform switching or to continue the second special display effect S2. Thereafter, with the end of the third release at timing t46, the special display effect is ended and the special ending effect B2 (FIG. 40A) is executed.

  Next, in the present embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is the same as that in the fifth embodiment.

<Supported state processing>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the in-support state processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. This process is executed in the support state in-process in step S2011 of the support state process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. This game is executed when the game result is the release result (result of transition to the support state) and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 307 is being executed.

  In the process during the support state, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first high winning support command (see step S1110 in FIG. 27) is received from the main control device 81. If the first high-winning support command has not been received, the process during the support state is terminated. On the other hand, if the first high-winning support command has been received, in step S2402, the main controller 81 issues a normal command. It is determined whether or not an open command (see step S1306 in FIG. 29) has been received, and it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 has been switched from the closed state to the open state.

  When the usual opening command is received, that is, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, the round counter SRC2 in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. The round counter SRC2 is for counting the number of times the electric accessory 307 is opened in the first high winning support state.

  In subsequent step S2404, it is determined whether or not a standby flag is stored in various flag storage areas 247 of RAM 244. The standby flag indicates that the electric accessory 307 is in a standby period. This standby flag is stored in the flag storage area 247 when it is determined that the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the electric accessory 307 is switched from the closed state to the open state. If it is recognized, the flag storage area 247 is deleted.

  If the standby flag is stored, the standby flag stored in the flag storage area 247 is deleted in step S2405. After execution of step S2405, or when a negative determination is made in steps S2402 and S2404, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not a general map closing command (see step S1315 in FIG. 29) is received from the main control device 81. Then, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state.

  When the usual closing command is received, that is, when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state, whether or not the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is “3” in step S2407, that is, Then, it is determined whether or not the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the end of the third (last) opening. If the value of the round counter is not “3” and the switch to the closed state of the electric accessory 307 corresponds to the end of the first or second opening, the first special display effect S1 is executed in step S2408. It is determined whether it is in the middle.

  If the first special display effect S1 is being executed, a process for performing the second special display effect S2 is executed in step S2409 in order to switch the special display effect to the second special display effect S2. In this step, a command including information on the content of the second special display effect S2 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the second special display effect S2 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. . In a succeeding step S2410, a standby flag is stored in various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2407 that the value of the round counter SRC2 is “3”, that is, if the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the closed state corresponds to the end of the third opening, the process proceeds to step S2411. The value of the round counter SRC2 is cleared to “0”.

  After the execution of steps S2410 and S2411, or when a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is determined in step S2412 whether a standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the standby flag is not stored, the process in the support state is ended. On the other hand, if the standby flag is stored, the process in the support state is ended after executing the process in the standby period in step S2413.

  Here, the processing during the standby period in step S2413 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the processing during the standby period, first, in step S2501, whether or not the value of the round counter SRC2 of the RAM 244 is “1”, that is, the first standby period between the first release and the second release. It is determined whether it is a waiting period. When the value of the round counter SRC2 is “1” and is in the first waiting period, whether or not it is the first specific timing (see FIG. 60B), that is, the second special display effect S2 to the second It is determined whether or not the timing for switching to one special display effect S1 has been reached. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 5.5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the first opening of the electric accessory 307 (in other words, the start of the first waiting period).

  Here, the MPU 242 measures the elapsed time from the end of the first release using the elapsed counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Specifically, the counting process of the elapsed counter is started based on the reception of the usual closing command, and the count value is incremented (updated) by 1 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In step S2502, the arrival of the first specific timing is determined with reference to the value of the elapsed counter.

  As a result, if it is determined that it is not the first specific timing, the process during the standby period is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the first specific timing, in step S2503, the number of reserved memories (second start reserved memory number RbN) of the second special figure is grasped, and the number is increased to four (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not it has been reached. In this step, the second sub-reserved area 250b provided in the reserved storage area 250 (FIG. 32) of the RAM 244 is referred to grasp the number of reserved memories in the second special figure.

  If the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is not four, in step S2504, the process for performing the first special display effect S1 is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and then during the standby period The process ends. In step S2504, a command including information on the content of the first special display effect S1 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the first special display effect S1 from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2503 that the number of reserved memories in the second special figure has reached the upper limit, the game times in the first special figure are being executed in step S2505 (during variable display or stop display). It is determined whether it is medium). In this step, after receiving a special figure change command for the lower working port 305 (see step S613 in FIG. 22) from the main controller 81, a special figure change end command for the lower working port 305 (step S409 in FIG. 20). Whether or not the game times of the first special figure are being executed is determined based on whether or not the game is received.

  If the game times of the first special figure are being executed, in step S2506, the remaining fluctuations of the first special figure until the end of the fluctuation display based on the information about the fluctuation display time included in the special figure fluctuation command. Know the display time (including the stop display period). On the other hand, if the game times of the first special figure are not being executed, it means that the game times of the second special figure are being executed. Therefore, in step S2507, the special figure changing command for the upper operating port 303 is obtained. The remaining fluctuation display time of the second special figure until the end of the fluctuation display is grasped based on the information related to the fluctuation display time included in.

  After the execution of step S2506 or step S2507, in step S2508, within 2 seconds from the first specific timing, that is, between the first specific timing and the end of the release period immediately after the first specific timing, It is determined whether or not a special figure game is started. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation period grasped in steps S2506 and S2507 is shorter than 3 seconds.

  If it is determined in step S2508 that a new game time of the second special figure will be started within 3 seconds, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure has reached the upper limit of four at the first specific timing. This means that during the release period immediately after that, the number of reserved storage in the second special figure becomes three and one free area is generated. In this case, it progresses to step S2509 and the process for performing 1st special display effect S1 is performed. In this step, control is performed so that the first special display effect S1 is executed with a delay of 0.5 sec compared to the case of step S2504. This is because the timing for generating the free space is delayed compared to the case where the number of reserved storage in the second special figure has not reached the upper limit at the time of the first specific timing. This is to suppress the launch of game balls that are not attached.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2508 that the game time of the second special figure is not started within 3 seconds, the process during the standby period is ended as it is to continue the execution of the second special display effect S2.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the value of the round counter SRC2 in the RAM 244 is not “1”, it means that the current standby period is the second standby period between the second release and the third release. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2510, whether or not it is the second specific timing (see FIG. 60B), that is, whether or not the switching timing from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1 has been reached. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether or not 6.5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the second opening of the electric accessory 307 (in other words, the start of the second waiting period). When it is determined that it is the second specific timing, the process proceeds to the processing after step S2503, and when it is determined that it is not the second specific timing, the process during the standby period is ended.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game when the electric accessory 307 is controlled to be opened and closed in the first high winning support state will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

<Case 1>
Case 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 in the case where the number of reserved storage in the second special figure has not reached the upper limit number at the first specific timing.

  In the case of FIG. 63, the game of the first special figure is not executed at the start of the first release, and the game of the second special figure is immediately performed with the winning of the first game ball to the upper operation port 303. Times are executed. This game time usually corresponds to a result of losing, and the variable display time is set to 7 sec.

  When the opening period related to the first high winning support state is started at the timing t51, the first special display effect S1 is displayed on the display screen G. By visually recognizing the first special display effect S1, the player is prompted to launch a game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307. As a result, as described in the first embodiment, five game balls can be awarded to the upper operating port 303 during the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and the reserved memory of the second special figure is stored. The number reaches 4 (upper limit).

  At timing t52, when the first opening of the electric accessory 307 ends and the first standby period starts, the second special display effect S2 is displayed on the display screen G. The player is prompted to wait (stop) the player's launch by visually recognizing the second special display effect S2. Thereby, launching of the game ball in a state where the electric accessory 307 is closed is suppressed.

  Then, when the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning are finished, the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the second winning are started at timing t53. Along with this, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure decreases by one, and one free area is generated in the second result display area reserved area Rb of the RAM 204.

  Then, when the timing t54 (first specific timing) 2 seconds before the second opening of the electric accessory 307 is reached, the hold status of the second special figure is grasped. Since the number of reserved memories is not four, the first special display effect S1 is executed, and the special display effect on the display screen G is switched from the second special display effect S2 to the first special display effect S1. By visually recognizing the first special display effect S1, the player is prompted to launch a game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307. As a result, during the second opening of the electric accessory 307, one game ball can win a prize in the upper operation port 303, and the number of reserved memories in the second special figure becomes four again.

  At timing t55, when the second opening of the electric accessory 307 ends and the second standby period starts, the second special display effect S2 is displayed on the display screen G. In addition, when the game time of the second special figure corresponding to the second winning is corresponding to the result of normal losing and the variation display time is 7 sec, it corresponds to the third winning at the timing t56. The game times of the second special figure are started, and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes three.

  When the timing t57 (second specific timing) 2 seconds before the third opening of the electric accessory 307 is reached, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is grasped. Since the number of stored memories is not four, the first special display effect S1 is executed, and the launch of a game ball aimed at the electric accessory 307 is prompted. As a result, during the third opening of the electric accessory 307, one game ball can win a prize in the upper operation port 303, and the number of reserved memories in the second special figure becomes four again. This makes it possible to finish the first high-winning support state in a state where the reserved memory of the second special drawing is full.

<Case 2>
Next, as case 2, a case where the number of reserved memories in the second special figure reaches the upper limit number at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit at the first specific timing, the variation display time of the game number of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning is long, The game time of the first special figure is being executed at the start of the first release of the object 307, and the start of the game time of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize is delayed. . FIG. 64 exemplifies a case where the game number of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning game corresponds to the losing reach result and the variation display time is set to 12 sec.

  When the timing t62 (first specific timing) 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307 is reached, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is grasped. In the case of FIG. 64, since the game times corresponding to the first winning to the upper working port 303 are continued for 12 seconds, the period from the start of the first waiting period (timing t61) to timing t62. The game times of the second special figure are not started. For this reason, if the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is four at the start of the first waiting period, it will be four at the timing t62. In the case of FIG. 64, the second special figure is not started within 3 seconds from the timing t62, and the second special figure until the timing t64 when the second opening of the electric accessory 307 ends. The state in which the number of stored storages is four continues.

  In this case, the first special display effect S1 is not executed, and the second special display effect S2 is continuously displayed. That is, even when the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 arrives, the first special display effect S1 is not executed. As a result, even if the second release of the electric accessory 307 is performed, it is possible to prompt the player to wait for the launch of the game ball in a situation where the number of reserved memories in the second special figure cannot be increased. .

  At the timing t64 (second specific timing) 2 sec before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is not four, so the execution timing of the first special display effect S1 has arrived. Accordingly, the first special display effect S1 is executed.

<Case 3>
Next, as case 3, another example in which the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number at the first specific timing will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 65, the game times of the first special figure are being executed at the start of the first opening of the electric accessory 307, and the start of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning is delayed. The case is illustrated. Note that the game game of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning game corresponds to the result of normal losing, and the variable display time is set to 7 sec.

  In the case of FIG. 65, the game times of the first special figure are executed halfway through the first opening period of the electric accessory 307, so that the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning are shown. The start timing (timing t71) is shifted to the latter half of the opening period. As a result, the game time of the second special figure corresponding to the second winning is started at the timing t74 which is 1 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307.

  In this case, at the timing t72 (first specific timing) that is 2 sec before the second opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is four, but the timing at which the second opening ends from this timing. Until t75, the number of reserved storage in the second special figure is decreased by 1, and a free space is generated. In this case, the first special display effect S1 is executed because the game times of the second special figure are started within 3 seconds from the first specific timing. As a result, even if there is no margin in the number of reserved memories in the second special figure at the first specific timing, when there is a margin in the number of reserved memories in the second special figure before the end of the second opening, the upper working port 303 is entered. Can be promoted.

  Further, the first special display effect S1 in this case is performed at a timing t73 0.5 seconds after the first specific timing (execution timing of the first special display effect S1). Compared to the case of FIG. 63, there is a margin in the number of reserved memories in the second special figure with a delay, so by delaying the display timing of the first special display effect S1, there is a margin in the number of reserved memories in the second special figure. The launching (consumption) of the game ball until the occurrence of is suppressed.

  Note that at the timing t76 (second specific timing) 2 sec before the third opening of the electric accessory 307, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is not four, so the execution timing of the original first special display effect S1 The first special display effect S1 is executed at (timing t76).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  While performing the special display effect corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the electric accessory 307, the mode of the special display effect can be changed according to the hold status of the second special drawing.

  In order to efficiently enter a game ball into the upper working port 303, the electric accessory 307 is in an open state for the convenience of determining whether or not the second special figure is within the range of the holding upper limit number of the second special figure. It is desirable to allow a game ball to enter the upper working port 303 when the number of stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is less than the upper limit, and to refrain from entering otherwise. Become. However, if such a game is to be performed at the player's discretion, the player must always pay attention not only to the situation of the electric accessory 307 but also to the number of holds in the second special figure. It tends to be distracting.

  In this regard, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a special display effect having a correlation with both the switching of the electric accessory 307 to the open state and the hold status of the second special figure. For this reason, if the player proceeds with the game with reference to the special display effect even if he / she does not grasp the switching situation of the electric accessory 307 and the holding situation of the second special figure, he / she will take those situation into consideration. You can play games naturally. As a result, distraction is suppressed, and it is possible to increase concentration on the game. In addition, the degree of attention to the special display effect can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  As the special display effect, the first special display effect S1 in a mode that suggests that the player is switched to the open state of the electric accessory 307 or prompts the player to aim at the electric accessory 307, and the game A second special display effect S2 in a mode that prompts the player to wait for a game or to stop the launch of a game ball is set, and these effects are selectively used. Thereby, the player's launch operation can be assisted by the special display effect, and it becomes easy to play a game suitable for each situation of the holding situation of the electric accessory 307 and the second special figure.

  The execution timing of the first special display effect S1 is set before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state. Thereby, the player can grasp the first special display effect S1 in advance, and it is possible to launch the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 307 at an appropriate timing. In addition, the second special figure holding status at the execution timing is grasped, and the execution presence / absence of the first special display effect S1 is switched based on the grasping result. In this case, it is possible to make a notification reflecting the latest on-hold status, and it is possible to increase the reliability and interest in the special display effect.

  It was set as the structure which performs a special display effect in the waiting period (opening period, the 1st waiting period, the 2nd waiting period) just before the electric accessory 307 is switched to an open state. Thereby, while being able to utilize a special display effect as one effect in the 1st high winning support state, it becomes possible to report according to the execution mode of the latest open state.

  Even when the number of reserved memories in the second special figure reaches the upper limit number at the execution timing (first specific timing, second specific timing) of the first special display effect S1, the switching control of the electric accessory 307 is completed. When the number of reserved memories in the second special figure decreases, the first special display effect S1 is executed. As a result, even if there is no allowance in the hold status of the second special figure at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, if there is a surplus before the switching control is completed, notification based on that is performed. Can do. As a result, it is possible to favorably assist efficient ball entry into the upper working port 303, and interest is improved.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 307 is in a closed state, the winning of the upper working port 303 is impossible. However, the winning combination may be difficult. For example, the opening / closing members 331 and 511 may be configured to be half-opened without completely closing the upper operation port 303. In short, it is sufficient if the ease of winning in the upper working port 303 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing and opening is arbitrary.

  (2) In each of the above-described embodiments, as the “variable receiving means”, the electric opening / closing member 331 stands at the closed position and is moved forward from the closed position to be displaced to the open position. 307, but may be of other configurations such as a lateral opening type and a front / rear slide type. That is, the configuration of the electric accessory is arbitrary as long as the receiving region can be formed on the first flow down path R1 when switched to the open state.

  In addition, as a side-opening type electric accessory, a protrusion protruding forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and having an opening as a ball entry part, and an axis line in a direction intersecting with the game board are provided in the protrusion. A movable blade as a movable body that rotates about the center, and the movable blade rotates to change the degree of opening of the opening, so that the game ball can be received or received easily in the opening portion State) and a closed state (second state in which a game ball cannot be received in the ball-entry portion or is less likely to be received than in the first state). In this configuration, the game ball is often unable to flow or difficult to flow in front of the electric accessory (protruding portion), so in a state where the movable blade is located at the closed position in front view from the front of the gaming machine. The whole of the electric accessory including the movable blade and the protruding portion is retracted from the first flow path R1, and when the movable blade is displaced to the open position, only the movable blade intersects the first flow path R1. Good.

  In addition, as a front and rear slide type electric accessory, a projecting portion that projects forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and has an opening as a ball entry portion that opens upward, and a movable plate as a movable body that can move forward and backward in the front and rear direction The movable plate is retreated from an advanced position where the movable plate covers the opening from above to a retracted position where the area covering the opening is reduced, and the opening degree is expanded to form a receiving region, and the closed state (entered). Examples include switching from a second state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult to receive into a ball part to an open state (a first state in which a game ball can be received into the ball part or easier to receive than in the second state). In this configuration, the receiving region may be formed on the first flow down path R1 when viewed from above.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 307 and the lower working port 305 are arranged vertically, but the arrangement direction thereof may be oblique. As long as the electric accessory 307 is located upstream of the lower operating port 305 and the receiving area RA is formed on the first flow path R1, the arrangement direction thereof is arbitrary.

  (4) Although the left-right width of the opening / closing member 331 (size of the receiving area RA) is about three game balls, it is larger than the left-right width of the lower working port 305 (size of the lower working port 305). It is possible to adopt a configuration in which only the game balls flowing down the first flow path with the two being equal can be awarded to the upper operation port 303.

  In the configuration in which game balls that flow down flow paths other than the first flow down path R1 can also win the upper working port 303, the left-right width of the opening / closing member 331 is at least twice the left-right width of the lower working port 305, and It is preferable to make it 5 times or less. By setting it to be twice or more, game balls other than the game balls on the first flow down path R1 can be included in the winning targets for the upper operation port 303. Moreover, the following effect is anticipated by setting it as 5 times or less. If the size exceeds five times, winning in the upper working port 303 becomes too easy, and the frequency of switching to the open state must be reduced due to the specifications of the gaming machine. In this regard, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately limit the winning to the upper working port 303, and it is possible to appropriately secure the frequency of switching to the open state. Furthermore, as a result of the increase in the occupying ratio in the game area, there is a possibility that restrictions on the flow area of game balls and the installation area of other game parts may be strengthened. It can be configured.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls flowing down the second and third flow down paths R2 and R3 do not win the lower operation port 305 in a state where the electric accessory 307 is switched to the closed state. However, it may be configured to be able to win a prize. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that makes it harder to win than the game ball flowing down the first flow down path R1.

  (6) In the third embodiment, the opening / closing member 511 is linearly moved back and forth. However, as in the other embodiments, the closed position is obtained by rotating forward about the rotation axis. It is good also as a structure displaced to an open position. In this case, the second guide portion 503 inserted through the through hole 517 may be curved so as to have a forward arc shape in a side view (as viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft). As a result, interference between the opening / closing member 511 and the second guide portion 503 can be alleviated, and the through hole 517 can be reduced in size, and the rigidity and strength of the opening / closing member 511 can be increased.

  In such a configuration, the first guide portion 365 may be hung down to the front of the opening / closing member 511, and the lower end portion thereof may have an arc shape similar to that of the second guide portion 503. That is, the first guide portion 365 is configured in the same manner as the first guide portion 603 according to the fourth embodiment, so that the distance between the first guide portion 365 and the second guide portion 503 (the distance in FIG. 7). L6) can be easily contracted, and the game ball is prevented from spilling outside between the two guide portions 365 and 503.

  In the embodiments other than the third embodiment, the opening / closing member 331 may be configured to linearly move back and forth.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pair of left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451, and 503 is provided as “regulating means” or “guide means”. However, only one of them may be configured. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the embodiments described above, taking into consideration the regulation of the direction in which the game balls flow down and the guidance of the game balls. The same applies to the first guide portions 365 and 603.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first guide portions 365 and 603 are configured by continuous walls extending in the guide direction. However, all or part of the first guide portions may be configured by a plurality of game nails. In this case, the plurality of game nails may be arranged in the guide direction so that the distance between them is less than the diameter of the game ball. According to this configuration, in the process of guiding the game ball, the game ball comes into contact with the game nail, so that the flow speed of the game ball is easily reduced, and the period until it reaches the lower operation port 305 or the receiving area RA is increased. It becomes easy to prolong. As a result, the visibility of the movement of the game ball is increased, and it is easy to produce an effect using the above-described period, and the interest is improved.

  (9) In the above embodiments, the left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 have the same length (vertical width). It may be different. In this case, the flowing-down direction of the game ball may be changed by bending the second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 on the long side from the middle position. The same applies to the first guide portion 365.

  (10) In the above-described embodiments, the left and right second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503 and the first guide portion 603 have the same protruding amount, but the protruding amounts may be different. Good. The same applies to the first guide portion 365.

  (11) In the first embodiment, the second guide portion 371 is integrally formed with the opening / closing member 331. In the second and third embodiments, the second guide portions 403, 451, and 503 are guided upward. Although formed integrally with the passage 333, the second guide portion may be configured separately from the opening / closing member 331 and the upper guide passage 333, and connected to them by using an engaging portion or a fastener. In this case, when the second guide part is damaged, for example, when a part of the second guide part is lost due to an impact from the game ball, the replacement of the second guide part is sufficient, and the repair becomes easy. However, in view of the number of parts and assembly workability at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is preferable.

  (12) In the first embodiment, when the opening / closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, a part or all of the second guide portion 371 may be accommodated (entered) in the lower operation port 305. . In this case, the restriction on the degree of opening of the opening / closing member 331 can be relaxed, and the opening / closing member 331 can be easily opened largely. In addition, the distance between the opening / closing member 331 and the lower working port case 337 can be shortened to make them closer.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the distance between the left and right second guide portions 371 is larger than the left and right width of the lower working port case 337 and the opening / closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, each second guide The portion 371 may be configured to enter the left and right outer sides of the lower working port case 337. Also with this configuration, the restriction on the degree of opening of the opening / closing member 331 can be relaxed, and the opening / closing member 331 can be easily opened greatly. In addition, the distance between the opening / closing member 331 and the lower working port case 337 can be shortened to make them closer.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the game nail is not provided between the opening / closing members 331 and 511 and the lower operation port case 337, but a game nail may be provided. In this case, in the first embodiment, when the opening / closing member 331 is displaced to the open position, the two game nails may be juxtaposed in the left-right direction so that the left and right second guide portions 371 are accommodated therebetween. . In this case, if these game nails are bent too much in the direction in which they approach each other, it becomes difficult to operate the opening / closing member 331 properly by interfering with the second guide portion 371, so that extreme nail bending is suppressed. . In addition, you may provide the said game nail so that both may be settled between the 2nd guide parts 371 on either side.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the second guide portion 371 is configured by a continuous wall extending in the guide direction. However, all or part of the second guide portion may be configured by a plurality of game nails. In this case, the plurality of game nails may be arranged in the guide direction so that the distance between them is less than the diameter of the game ball. In such a configuration, the game nail may be integrally formed with the opening / closing member 331 as a synthetic resin (same material as the opening / closing member 331).

  (15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the front surface 331b of the opening / closing member 331 positioned at the closed position is substantially flush with the front surface 320b of the base body 320. However, the configuration is positioned rearward of the front surface 320b. Also good. Even in this case, it is suppressed that the game ball is caught by the opening / closing member 331 when passing in front of the opening / closing member 331 and the flow of the game ball is stagnated or the opening / closing member 331 is damaged.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, the first region where the first guide portions 365 and 603 are provided and the first guide portions 365 and 603 are provided in the light transmitting portion 341 of the first light emitting portion 311. Although the light emission mode is shared with the second region that is not present, the light emission mode of each region may be different. That is, since the game ball cannot flow down or is difficult to flow in front of the first guide portions 365 and 603, the light emitting mode of the first region may be the same as that of the second light emitting portion 317. In this case, a light shielding member may be provided behind the light transmitting portion 341 so as to prevent light from the light emitter that emits light from the first region from entering the second region.

  (17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the second light emitting unit 317 protrudes forward, but may be configured not to protrude. In this case, similarly to the translucent part 341 of the first light emitting part 311, the second light emitting part 317 is configured such that the front surface thereof is substantially flush with the base body 320, and the game flow is in front of the second light emitting part 317. Can flow down.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, the light emission modes of the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 are made different by the light emission control of the light emitting substrate 359, but the light emission modes may be made different depending on the specifications of the light emitters. For example, as the light emitter for the second light emitting unit 317, a light emitter capable of emitting light with higher luminance than the light emitter for the first light emitting unit 311 is disposed. It is good also as a structure from which a light emission aspect differs.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, the flow velocity of the game ball may be different between the front of the first light emitting unit 311 and the front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511. Specifically, the flow velocity of the game ball may be faster when the game ball flows down in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511 than in front of the first light emitting unit 311. For example, it is possible to provide a decelerating means for decelerating the game ball in front of the first light emitting unit 311 while not providing the decelerating means in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511.

  In a configuration in which a game ball flows down in front of the opening and closing members 331 and 511, when the flow of the game ball stagnate in front of the opening and closing members 331 and 511, the game ball prevents the opening and closing members 331 and 511 from being displaced to the open position. May occur. Therefore, by allowing the game ball to pass quickly in front of the opening and closing members 331 and 511, occurrence of the inconvenience is suppressed. On the other hand, by slowing the flow of the game ball above the opening / closing members 331 and 511, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the flow of the game ball toward the electric accessory 307 (upper operating port 303). It is possible to effectively raise the expectation that the upstream game ball will enter the upper operation port 303.

  (20) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of downflow paths (first to third downflow paths R1 to R3) that allow the game ball to win the upper operating port 303 are adjacent to each other, but each downflow process is dispersed. It is good also as a structure where paths | routes space apart. In this case, notification means (first light emitting unit 311) for performing specific notification may be provided on each route. However, when there are three or more downflow paths, it is not always necessary to provide the notification means corresponding to all the downflow paths, and it is sufficient to provide the notification means on at least two paths.

  (21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game balls guided downward by the first guide portions 365 and 603 above the opening and closing members 331 and 511 (the electric accessory 307) are transferred to the opening and closing members 331 and 511. Although it is configured to guide downward in the forward direction, a change means is provided in front of the opening / closing members 331 and 511 to change the flow direction of the game ball to the left and right, and the game is performed in front of the members 331 and 511. It is good also as a structure which changes the flow direction of a sphere. As a result, the front area of the electric accessory 307 can be used as a change area for changing the flow direction of the game ball. In this case, the movement of the game ball can be diversified as compared with a configuration in which the game ball only flows down in front of the electric accessory 307, and the interest is improved.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball is configured to flow in front of the first light emitting unit 311 (translucent unit 341) as the “notifying unit”. It is possible to display a specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the control, and it is configured so that a game ball can flow down behind it, and light-transmitting so that the rear of the notification means can be seen from the front of the gaming machine It is good also as a structure which has (transparency). As the notification means in this case, for example, an edge-light type transmissive display using a light guide plate (light is emitted from the end surface of the light guide plate in which predetermined irregularities (grooves) are formed on the front or rear surface, and the light Can be used by irradiating light forward by reflecting or refracting the light by the unevenness and performing a predetermined light emission display on the light guide plate), a transmissive liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel), or the like. Also with this configuration, it is possible to grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the electric accessory 307, and the same effects as those in the above embodiments are expected.

  Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure from which a game ball can flow down not only behind but also ahead of an alerting | reporting means. Since the space in the front-rear direction can be used effectively, the flow area can be substantially enlarged. In this case, for example, with the distribution means for distributing the game balls to the front side and the rear side upstream of the notification means, the game balls flow down in front of the notification means, and the case of flowing down behind Thus, the easiness of winning in the upper working port 303 (ease of being picked up by the electric accessory 307) may be varied. Thereby, the game nature which enjoys whether a player passes ahead or back of an alerting | reporting means is added, and interest property improves.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 307 is provided as the “variable receiving means”. However, the “variable receiving means” is not limited to the one that opens and closes the upper operation port (lottery port of the second special drawing) 303. The other winning entrances such as the big winning entrance 32a and the general winning entrance 31 may be opened and closed. For example, when the variable winning device 32 that opens and closes the big winning opening 32a is a “variable receiving means”, the variable winning device 32 is arranged upstream of the lower operation port 305, and the receiving area thereof is on the first flow down path R1. It is good to be the structure formed. In this case, when the variable winning device 32 is switched to the open state in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to prevent the lower operating port 305 from inhibiting the winning to the large winning port 32a.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the electric accessory that opens and closes the other winning entrances such as the big winning entrance 32a and the general winning entrance 31 is a "variable receiving means", the downstream "entrance portion" It is not limited to the lottery entrance, and may be another entrance entrance such as the through gate 35, the general winning entrance 31, the lottery entrance of the second special drawing. In this case, the “entrance portion” on the downstream side is not limited to the one not including the electric accessory, and may include the electric accessory.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, the lower operation port 305 is provided as the downstream “entrance part”. However, such “entrance part” is not limited to the lottery entrance of the first special drawing, Other entrances such as a winning entrance 31 may be used. In addition, the downstream “entrance part” may be a large winning opening 32a and may include an electric accessory (variable winning device 32).

  (25) In each of the embodiments described above, whether or not the first special figure is determined based on the winning of the lower operating port 305 is determined, and whether or not the second special figure is determined based on the winning of the upper operating port 303 is performed. However, a common winning / failure determination may be performed even if a game ball wins in either of the operating ports 303 and 305. In this case, a configuration including only one type as a special symbol may be used, or in a configuration including the first and second special symbols, both the operation ports 303 and 305 may correspond to one of the special symbols.

  (26) In the above embodiments, the player is more advantageous to win the upper operating port 303 than to win the lower operating port 305. However, the advantages of the operating ports 303 and 305 are equal. It may be reversed or reversed. However, in order to increase the expectation for winning a prize to the upper operating port 303 and to enhance the attractiveness of the first high winning support state, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

  (27) In each of the above-described embodiments, the ease of selection of 15R jackpot (ratio of 15R jackpot) in the case of a jackpot is made different between the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305 (see FIG. 15). The upper operating port 303 is more advantageous to the player than the lower operating port 305. However, after the opening / closing execution mode ends with the same ease of selection of the 15R jackpot and the breakdown (privilege) of the jackpot type It is good also as a structure which provides a difference in the predominance of the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 305 by changing the transition rate (transition rate to an advantageous state) to high frequency support mode or high probability mode. In addition, the upper operating port 303 is more advantageous than the lower operating port 305 in terms of the ease of selecting the 15R jackpot and the jackpot type, and the upper operating port 303 is also more advantageous in terms of the rate of transition to the above-described advantageous state. It is good also as composition which becomes.

  (28) In each of the above-described embodiments, whether or not a prize is awarded to either the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 305 is performed using a common determination table (FIGS. 14A and 14B). Although it was set as the structure, it is good also as a structure which is provided with the success / failure table for the upper action | operation opening | mouth 303 and the lower action | operation opening | mouth 305, respectively, and the value of the random number which becomes a big hit win is different in the upper action opening 303 and the lower action opening 305. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot may be the same for the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 305, or may be different.

  (29) In each of the above-described embodiments, the hold information in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially determined as the target of the success / failure determination over the hold information in the first result display section reservation area Ra. The converse may also be possible, and it may be configured to determine whether or not it is a winning order (acquiring order). However, in view of the superiority of the upper working port 303 in the type table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 15B), the configuration of each of the above embodiments is preferable.

  (30) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 performs the switching control of the electric accessory 307, but other control devices (production control device 82, display control device 212, payout control device 97, etc.) It is good also as a structure to perform.

  (31) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 303 and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (four), but the hold information is stored. It is good also as a structure which is not performed. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. This is the same for each winning in the lower operating port 305 and the through gate 35.

  (32) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on winning to the upper working port 303 is stored with the upper limit being four, but it may be less than four or may be five or more. May be. In this case, the upper limit of the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state (the opening period of the first opening when there are multiple openings) can be set according to the upper limit holding number. Specifically, it may be set to a period that is a product of an added value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number and 0.6 seconds that is a game ball firing cycle. In addition, the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operation port 303 in the first high winning support state can be set in accordance with the upper limit of the number of reservations. Specifically, it may be an added value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number.

  In addition, the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on the winnings to the lower operation port 305 and the through gate 35 may be less than 4, or 5 or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the upper limit memory | storage number of the hold information based on the winning to each operating port 303,305 and the through gate 35 differs.

  (33) In each of the above embodiments, the special light emission effect is started by the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317 3 seconds before the opening starts. As long as it is before opening, the specific timing is arbitrary. For example, the period from the start of the special light emission effect to the start of opening of the electric accessory 307 may be shorter than the required period from when the game ball is launched until the electric accessory 307 is reached. In this case, even if the game ball is fired after seeing the special light emission effect, it becomes difficult to win the game ball in the upper operating port 303 at the optimal timing for reaching the upper limit number of the reserved memory number of the second special figure, It is possible to suppress aiming. The same applies to the special display effect, and the execution timing of the special display effect is not limited to 2 seconds before the opening of the electric accessory 307, as long as the electric accessory 307 is opened.

  (34) In each of the above embodiments, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the shift to the support state due to the first high-winning support state occurs. However, the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Even in such a case, the first high winning support state may be generated. In this case, only the first high-winning support state may be set as the support state for the high-frequency support mode, or a plurality of support states with different ease of winning may be set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a 1st high winning support state produces only when it is a high frequency support mode. However, in view of the fact that the high-frequency support mode is in a state where it is easy to expect a winning to the upper working port 303 in the first place, in order to enhance the attractiveness of the first high-winning support state, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is used. It is preferable.

  (35) In each of the above-described embodiments, the specific light emission effect is a dedicated effect in the first high winning support state. However, even if the electric accessory 307 is opened and closed in the second high winning support state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed. Good. In this case, the specific light emission effect is more easily performed in the first high-winning support state than in the second high-winning support state, that is, when the support state of the electric accessory 307 is the first high-winning support state. Alternatively, the specific light emission effect may be performed. The same applies to the specific display effect. However, from the standpoint of concentrating the first high-winning support state and suppressing the confusion of the player, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is preferable.

  In addition, not only in the low-frequency support mode but also in the configuration in which the first high-winning support state can be generated even in the high-frequency support mode, it is specified only when the first high-winning support state occurs in the low-frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure which performs a light emission effect and a specific display effect, and it is good also as a structure which performs a specific light effect and a specific display effect corresponding to generation | occurrence | production of a 1st prize winning support state irrespective of the difference in support mode. In the configuration in which the specific light emission effect and the specific display effect are performed in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the occurrence of the first high winning support state in the low frequency support mode is more likely in the high frequency support mode. It may be easier to perform than the occurrence of the first high winning support state.

  (36) In each of the above embodiments, when the upper limit of the number of winnings to the upper operation port 303 and the upper limit of each open period are set at the time of transition to the support state, and any of those conditions is satisfied Although the support state is completed or the electric accessory 307 is switched from the open state to the closed state, only one of the above conditions may be set.

  (37) In each of the above embodiments, assuming that there are four pieces of holding information based on winning in the upper operating port 303, the opening period of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state (multiple opening) In the case where there is, the upper limit of the opening period of the first opening) is set to 3 sec. However, since it is sufficient to suppress invalid winnings seen in relation to the determination of success / failure of the second special figure, the period may be less than 3 sec. In this case, it is good to set it as the period beyond 0.6 sec which is the launch period of a game ball so that at least 1 prize can be expected.

  When the number of reserved memories in the second special figure reaches the upper limit while suppressing invalid winnings, the opening period of the electric accessory 307 may be 3 sec or more and 3.6 sec or less. preferable. That is, a value obtained by multiplying the total number (5) of the game times of the second special figure and the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the second special figure by the game ball firing period is set as the lower limit value. An added value obtained by adding the above-described firing periods may be set as the upper limit value.

  (38) In each of the above embodiments, the first light emitting unit 311 is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the electric accessory 307. However, the detection sensor for the upper operation port 303 or the upper operation port 303 (game ball You may provide on the flow-down path | route (movement path | route) to the sensor which detects the winning of the game ball | bowl to the upper action | operation opening | mouth 303 by detecting passage. In this case, the light emitting means as the first light emitting unit 311 is provided in the electric accessory 307 so that both are integrated, or the light emitting means is provided inside the upper working port 303 (behind the opening / closing member 331 located at the closed position). Or better. In the latter case, for example, the entire opening / closing member 331 or the electric accessory 307 or a portion overlapping with the light emitting means as viewed from the front is transparent (translucent), and light from the light emitting means is transmitted to the opening / closing member 331 or the electric motor. It may be configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through the accessory 307.

  (39) In the first embodiment, on the assumption that there are four pieces of holding information based on winnings in the upper operating port 303, the upper limit winning number to the upper operating port 303 in the first high winning support state is set. Although the number is set to five, it is sufficient that the invalid winnings seen in relation to the determination of whether or not the second special figure is determined can be suppressed.

  (40) In each of the above-described embodiments, the usual hold information (open random number counter C4 or open type counter C5) stored in the electric utility reservation area 233 or the sub-side electric service reservation area 250c is used. It is good also as a structure which provides the destination specific means specified in the timing ahead before becoming the object of figure determination determination, and performs a special display effect based on the specific result of the destination specific means. In this case, it is possible to ensure a long notification period for the special display effect while the special display effect is started before the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the special display effect, or to diversify the special display effect to enhance the effect. However, in terms of simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is preferable.

  (41) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the relationship between the electric accessory 307 and the lower operation port 305 is that when the electric accessory 307 is switched to the open state, the receiving area RA is the lower operation port. It may not be formed on the flow path (first flow path R1) of the game ball to 305. For example, a configuration in which a winning opening corresponding to the lower operation opening 305 (a start winning opening in the first special drawing) is arranged upstream (upward) of the electric accessory 307 may be employed.

  (42) In the fifth embodiment, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal outage result is fixed to 7 seconds, but a plurality of variable display times having different lengths are set. May be. In such a configuration, it is preferable to set the length of the first waiting period in consideration of the difference in the variable display time. For example, 7 sec and 4 sec are set, and then the first waiting period is preferably 2.5 sec. In this case, if 4 sec is selected as the display time variation of the game number of the second special figure corresponding to the first prize, the variation display of the game time is likely to end before the second opening of the electric accessory 307 is started. On the other hand, when 7 sec is selected, it is difficult to finish. As a result, even if the result is the same normal deviation, it is possible to cause a case where an empty area is formed in the hold status of the second special figure and a case where it is not. In such a configuration, the selection probabilities of the variable display time of 7 sec and the variable display time of 4 sec may be equal or different. Moreover, when both selection probabilities differ, the latter may be higher than the former, and vice versa.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which the fluctuation | variation display time of the said game time changes according to the pending | holding condition of a 2nd special figure. For example, when the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is less than 3, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the normal outage result is set to 7 sec, and when the number is 3 or more, The variable display time can be set to 4 sec. In this case, if the first waiting period is set to 2.5 seconds, the game number change display is terminated before the second release starts only when the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is three or more. Can be made easier. As a result, the pleasure of adding three or more game balls to the upper operation port 303 at the first opening is added, and the interest is improved.

  (43) In the fifth embodiment, the game times of the second special figure corresponding to the first winning are configured to be finished before the second opening of the electric accessory 307. It is good also as a structure which can be terminated before opening. In other words, the configuration may be such that the new hold information of the second special figure can be held by performing the third release. The same applies to the sixth embodiment.

  (44) In the fifth embodiment, the first waiting period is set to a period (5.5 sec) shorter than the game display variation display time (7 sec) of the second special figure. You may set to a period longer than the fluctuation display time of game times. In this case, when a game ball wins the upper operating port 303 during the first opening of the electric accessory 307, if the game time corresponding to the winning is started before the end of the first opening, It is possible to reliably end the game times before the start of the second opening. Thereby, it becomes easy to form an empty area in the reserved area of the second special figure at the time of opening the second opening. Also, the second standby period (6.5 sec) may be set to a period longer than the game display variation display time of the second special figure, as described above.

  (45) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the opening period of the first opening is made longer than the opening period of the second opening. However, the lengths of these opening memories may be equal, and May be reversed. The same applies to the relationship between the second opening and the third opening, or the relationship between the first opening and the third opening. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment in view of the fact that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be easily stored early in the first high-winning support state, and that the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind.

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the opening period of the first opening is set to be the longest, but the opening period of the second opening or the third opening may be the longest. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment in view of the fact that the number of reserved memories of the second special figure can be easily stored early in the first high-winning support state, and that the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind.

  (46) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 305 are provided in the lower region PE4, and the game ball is fired so as to flow down either the left region PE2 or the right region PE3. Even if it makes it, it was set as the structure which can be awarded to both the operation ports 303 and 305, However, You may arrange | position so that a game can be divided. That is, for example, the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 303, and the lower operation port 305 are provided in one of the left region PE2 and the right region PE3. In this way, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the region on the side where the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 305 are provided, it is possible to win each operation port 303, 305. It becomes composition. In this case, an operating port corresponding to the first special drawing or the second special drawing is provided separately from both the operating ports 303 and 305, and the operating port is opposite to the region on the side where both the operating ports 303 and 305 are provided. It may be provided in the side region.

  In the sixth embodiment, when both the operation ports 303 and 305 are provided in one of the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, both the operation ports 303 and 305 are used instead of or in addition to the first special display effect S1. Notification of a mode that suggests that the game ball should be allowed to flow down in the region on the side where the ball is provided may be performed. For example, when both the operation ports 303 and 305 are provided in the right region PE3, the right notification can be performed. Thereby, a player's launch operation can be supported, and it becomes easy to play a game suitable for the switching situation of the electric accessory 307 and the holding situation of the second special figure.

  (47) In the sixth embodiment, the second special display effect S2 is performed only when the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is the upper limit number or the upper limit number. The configuration may be such that the second special display effect S2 is performed even if the number of reserved storages in the figure is not the upper limit number. For example, the second special display effect S2 may be configured not only when the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is four (upper limit number) but also when the number is three. That is, even if the prize can be won, the first special display effect S1 may not be executed when the reward (privilege) is small, such as when the number is limited to one.

  (48) In the sixth embodiment, when the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is the upper limit number at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, the next opening of the electric accessory 307 ends. It is good also as a structure which displays 2nd special display effect S2 irrespective of whether the number of holding | maintenance memory | storage decreases by doing.

  (49) In the sixth embodiment, the second special display effect S2 may not be displayed and the special display effect may not be executed in the display period of the second special display effect S2.

  (50) In the sixth embodiment, the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is the upper limit number at the execution timing of the first special display effect S1, and the next opening of the electric accessory 307 ends. In the case where the number of reserved memories does not decrease by the time, it may be configured to grasp the hold status of the first special figure. In addition, if there is an empty area in the reserved area of the first special figure, a special display effect “Aim at Hess Chucker !!” is displayed, and if there is not, the second special display effect S2 is displayed. It is good also as composition which performs. Here, “heso chucker” is a common name for the lower operation port 305, and the display can prompt the player to aim at the lower operation port 305 and launch a game ball. Thereby, it is possible to support the winning to the lower operation port 305 by utilizing the standby period, and the interest of the first high winning support state is improved.

  (51) In the sixth embodiment, when executing the first special display effect S1, instead of or in addition to the first special display effect S1, the remaining reservation up to the upper limit storage number of the second special figure Notification according to the number (for example, a display such as “Don't win a prize in the electric Chu!”) May be performed. Thereby, even if the player concentrates on the special display effect, it becomes possible to advance the game while grasping the remaining number up to the upper limit storage number of the second special figure.

  (52) In the sixth embodiment, whether the first special display effect S1 is executed when the execution condition of the first special display effect S1 is established in relation to the hold status of the second special figure. It is good also as a structure which provides the lottery means which lotteries whether or not, and performs 1st special display effect S1 at random. Thereby, the execution frequency of 1st special display effect S1 is reduced, and excessive assistance is suppressed.

  (53) In the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls may be less than 4 when a game ball is won in the upper working port 303. Specifically, it may be set to be equal to or less than the number (1) of game balls that can be fired in the opening period (1 sec) of the second opening of the electric accessory 307. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories in the second special figure has reached the upper limit number and the second release is made, even if the game ball is won in the upper operation port 303, more payout than the number of shots is obtained. It is not possible to increase the significance of refraining from launching game balls. As a result, the player's interest in the second special display effect S2 is increased, and the degree of attention to the special display effect is improved.

  (54) In the sixth embodiment, the holding status of the second special figure (in some cases, the holding situation of the first special figure, or the holding of the first and second special figures in the configuration described in (50) above) The execution mode of the first and second special display effects S1 and S2 is changed according to the situation), but instead of or in addition to this, the execution mode of the special light emission effect (see FIG. 37) is changed. It is good also as a structure. For example, when there is a vacancy in the second special figure, or when it occurs, a special light emission effect is executed at each specific timing, while when there is no vacancy in the second special figure, or the first special figure The second light emitting units 311 and 317 can be turned off so that the special light emission effect is not executed, or the execution intensity can be suppressed low by reducing the light emission intensity.

  In this case, the special light emission effect may not be executed during the closing period (standby period) of the electric accessory 307 in the first high winning support state. According to this, when the special light emission effect is not executed at a specific timing according to the fact that there is no space in the hold status of the second special figure, the execution state of the special light emission effect during the standby period is maintained as it is. In addition to simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load, it is possible to suppress confusion of the player by frequently changing the light emission states of the first and second light emitting units 311 and 317. it can.

  In addition, for example, when a transition to the first high-winning support state occurs in the high-winning support mode, when the electric accessory 307 is opened for the first time in the first high-winning support state (at the start of opening or during the open period). If there is no vacancy or does not occur in the hold status of the second special figure, a special light emission effect in advance (a special light emission effect for 3 seconds before the transition to the support state of the electric accessory 307 (see A2 and A3 in FIG. 37)) The special light emission effect during the opening period and the initial opening period may not be performed.

  (55) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The invention described in each of the following feature groups is as follows: “In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, a game ball can be entered and a game ball can be received or received easily There is known one having variable receiving means capable of switching to a first state and a second state where a game ball cannot be received or is difficult to be received in the ball-entry unit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). The background art “.” Was made with the problem to be solved by the invention “There is still room for improvement in improving interest”.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81) for acquiring first information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry unit;
First determination means for performing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means (a function for executing the determination processing for the lower working port 305 by the main control device 81);
A second entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit;
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (a function for executing the determination process for the upper working port 303 by the main control device 81);
A first state (open state) that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or easily accepting a game ball in the second entrance part, and incapable of accepting a game ball in the second entrance part or more than in the first state A variable receiving means (an electric accessory 307) that can be switched to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to accept;
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and the game received in the predetermined receiving area A ball is configured to be received in the second entrance portion;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of game balls to the first ball entry section in the game area.

  In the above configuration, the first determination is made based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit, and the second determination is made based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first and second balls, the result that the game ball enters the first ball even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It may be difficult to enter the second entrance part. That is, the opportunity to receive the second determination is deprived, and a disadvantage that the player cannot properly enjoy the profit in the first state may occur.

  In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entry portion. For this reason, the game ball that flows down toward the first incoming ball part reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first incoming ball part, and reception of the game ball is inhibited by the first incoming ball part. It is suppressed. Thereby, the opportunity to receive the second determination is stably ensured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit that has reached the first state.

Feature A2. The variable receiving means has movable bodies (opening / closing members 331, 511) that are displaceable at a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position. The body is configured to be switchable from the second state to the first state by displacing from the second position to the first position,
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein when the movable body is positioned at the first position, the movable body is configured to be positioned on a flow path of the gaming ball to the first entrance portion. .

  According to the said structure, the movable body for switching the state of a variable receiving means can be functioned as a ball receiving part which receives the game ball which flows through the said flow-down path | route toward a 1st ball entry part. Thereby, it is possible to guide the game ball to the second entrance part at a position midway along the flow path, and to allow the game ball going to the first entrance part to enter the second entrance part suitably. .

  Feature A3. The feature A2 is characterized in that the movable body is configured to be retractable from the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entry portion when the movable body is displaced from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine described.

  According to the said structure, when the variable acceptance means is switched to the 2nd state, it is suppressed that the flow of the game ball to the 1st entrance part is inhibited by the movable body. Thereby, when a movable body is located in the 2nd position, it can play aiming at the entrance to the 1st entrance part, and without affecting the entrance situation to the 1st entrance part, It becomes possible to improve the ease of entering the second entrance part.

  Feature A4. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein when the variable receiving means is switched to the second state, a game ball can flow down in front of it.

  According to the above configuration, the front area of the variable receiving means can be used as the flow area of the game ball. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the game ball cannot flow down or is difficult to flow in front of the variable receiving means, the flow area is enlarged or the area that can be used as the flow area is increased. As a result, the entire game area (front of the game board) It is possible to reduce the ratio of the falling area occupied by. If the flow area is expanded, it will be easier to enhance the fun by diversifying the movement of the game ball, and if the flow area is reduced, the placement and expansion of game parts such as decorative members, movable accessories, and prize holes will be increased. Since it becomes easy to secure a space for increasing the size, it is possible to provide a preferable aspect in a gaming machine in which a gaming area is limited. Furthermore, the front area of the variable receiving means can be used as a part of the flow path to the first ball entry part, and the path can be simplified more easily than when the variable receiving means is bypassed to construct the flow path. Become. Thereby, it becomes easy for a player to grasp the route to the first entrance part, and playability is improved.

  In Feature A4, “the front” may be read as “the front side of the variable receiving means in the front view of the gaming machine”. Similarly, in the following features, “front of the variable receiving means” may be read as “the front side of the variable receiving means in the front view of the gaming machine”.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the player is configured to make the second determination more advantageous than the first determination.

  In the above configuration, since the second entrance portion is more advantageous than the first entrance portion, the player strongly desires to enter the second entrance portion. For this reason, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, there is a need to allow as many game balls as possible to enter the second entrance part. Under such circumstances, in the configuration described in any one of A1 to A4 above, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball heading for the first pitching portion enters the second pitching portion, It has a configuration in which entry to the 2 entry portion is prioritized. Thereby, it can be set as the structure suitable for a player's needs, and it becomes possible to raise game willingness.

Feature A6. First privilege granting means that can grant a first privilege based on a game ball entering the first pitching part (transition function to open / close execution mode for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81, payout control) A prize ball function based on winning in the lower operating port 305 by the device 97),
Based on the entry of the game ball into the second entrance part, second privilege granting means (upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. A function for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and a winning ball function based on winning in the upper operating port 303 by the payout control device 97),
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, comprising:

  In the above configuration, since the second privilege is more advantageous than the first privilege, the player strongly desires to enter the second entrance part. For this reason, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, there is a need to allow as many game balls as possible to enter the second entrance part. Under such circumstances, in the configuration described in any one of A1 to A4 above, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball heading for the first pitching portion enters the second pitching portion, It has a configuration in which entry to the 2 entry portion is prioritized. Thereby, it can be set as the structure suitable for a player's needs, and it becomes possible to raise game willingness.

  Feature A7. Any one of the features A1 to A6, wherein the variable receiving means and the first ball receiving portion are arranged vertically, and the variable receiving means is arranged above the first ball receiving portion. The gaming machine described.

  According to the said structure, when the variable acceptance means is a 1st state, the structure where priority is given to the 2nd entrance part can be implement | achieved by a simple structure. Furthermore, in appearance, it is possible to give the player an impression that a game ball can easily enter the second entrance part, and it is possible to improve game motivation.

  Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the variable receiving means is disposed adjacent to the first ball-injecting portion.

  According to the above configuration, since the variable receiving means is disposed adjacent to the first ball entry unit, it is easy for the player to grasp the game ball entry status in each ball entry unit without moving the line of sight. .

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature A5 or A6, “where the game ball has entered into the first and second pitching parts becomes a matter of great concern to the player, In addition, since it becomes easy to visually recognize the variable receiving means at the same time, it is expected that the player can easily grasp which ball has entered the ball, and the playability is improved.

  In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature A7, “It is easy to grasp the positional relationship between the first ball receiving portion and the variable receiving means at a glance, and an impression that the game ball easily enters the second ball entering portion. It is expected to be easier to give.

  Feature A9. The predetermined receiving area includes a game ball that flows down a first flow path that can enter the first ball entry part, and a ball that cannot enter the first ball entry part or enters the first ball flow part from the first flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to receive both a game ball that flows down a difficult second flow path.

  According to the above configuration, not only the game balls heading to the first ball entering part but also other game balls can easily enter the second ball entering part. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it is easy to expect that the game ball will be received by the second pitching portion, and the expectation for the first state to be increased, Switching to the 1 state can be easily recognized as an opportunity for the player, and the degree of attention to the variable receiving means can be increased.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein a size of the predetermined receiving area is larger than a size of an entrance of the first ball entry portion.

  In the above configuration, the difficulty of entering the second entrance in the first state is suppressed to be lower than the difficulty of entering the first entrance in the second state. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it is easy to expect that the game ball will be received by the second pitching portion, and the expectation for the first state to be increased, Switching to the 1 state can be easily recognized as an opportunity for the player, and the degree of attention to the variable receiving means can be increased.

  In the feature A10, preferably, the size of the predetermined receiving area can be set to be not less than 2 times and not more than 5 times the size of the entrance of the first ball entry portion. By setting it to 2 times or more, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball other than the game ball heading to the first pitching portion to enter the second pitching portion. Moreover, the following effect is anticipated by setting it as 5 times or less. If the size exceeds five times, it is too easy to enter the second entry part, and as a result, the frequency of switching to the first state has to be reduced due to the specifications of the gaming machine. In this regard, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately limit the entrance to the second entrance portion, and it is possible to appropriately ensure the frequency of switching to the first state. Furthermore, as a result of the increase in the occupation ratio of the variable receiving means in the game area, there is a possibility that restrictions on the flow area of game balls and the installation area of other game parts may be strengthened, but this is suppressed and the game area is limited The optimum configuration can be obtained.

  In the above feature A10, “the size of the predetermined receiving area” and “the size of the entrance of the first ball receiving portion” are respectively set to “the size of the predetermined receiving area in the front view from the front of the gaming machine”. ”And“ the size of the entrance of the first entrance part in the front view from the front of the gaming machine ”, or“ the width of the predetermined receiving area in the front view from the front of the gaming machine ”and“ the front from the front of the gaming machine ” It can be read as “the lateral width of the entrance of the first entrance portion”.

Feature A11. Provided in the game area, and having a passage portion (first and second game nails 281 and 282) having a passage width through which one game ball can pass;
The game ball that has passed through the passage portion can flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first entrance portion,
Guide means (first guide portions 365, 603) capable of guiding the game balls that have passed through the passage portion toward the first entrance portion are provided between the passage portion and the first entrance portion. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

  According to the above configuration, by restricting the game balls heading for the first entrance part to the game balls that have passed through the passage part, excessive entrance into the first and second entrance parts can be suppressed. . On the other hand, the game balls that have passed through the passage section are guided toward the first entrance section by the guide means, so that the game balls can be easily directed to the first entrance section and the receiving area, and the player can play with peace of mind. It becomes.

  In the feature A11, “the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first entrance portion” is “the game ball that has passed through the passage portion is It is possible to flow down the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entry part preferentially over the game ball that does not pass through the passage part "or" only the game ball that has passed through the passage part is the first ball entry. It may be read as “the flow path of the game ball to the club can flow down”.

Feature A12. A game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on the front surface;
The game according to Feature A11, wherein the guide means includes a wall portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board and extends along a guide direction of the game ball in a front view from the front of the gaming machine. Machine.

  According to the said structure, the game ball which passed the passage part can be guide | induced to a 1st ball | bowl entrance part or a receiving area | region stably. In addition, the game ball can flow down more smoothly than the case where the guide means is constituted by a game nail, and the stagnation of the flow of the game ball is suppressed.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to Feature A11 or A12, wherein the guide means includes a plurality of game nails arranged side by side in the guide direction of the game balls and having a mutual interval less than one game ball. .

  According to the above configuration, in the process of guiding the game ball, the game ball comes into contact with each game nail so that the flow speed of the game ball is easily reduced, and the period until it reaches the first entrance part or the receiving area It becomes easy to prolong. As a result, the visibility of the movement of the game ball is increased, and it is easy to produce an effect using the above-described period, and the interest is improved.

Feature A14. The variable receiving means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state,
Ball guide means (second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503, first guide portion 603) capable of guiding the game balls flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state to the first entrance portion. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, comprising:

  According to the said structure, the front area | region of a variable receiving means can be utilized as a guidance area | region to a 1st entrance part. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game ball to the first ball entering portion as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only flows down in front of the variable receiving means.

Feature A15. The variable control means includes
Variable acceptance control means (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (the normal game state by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once The function to execute the migration process), and
With
The specific state is controlled so as to end when the number of game balls entering the second ball entering part reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the upper limit number is five or less.

  When the second determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second entrance, according to this configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the second determination It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid entry to the second entry portion when viewed in relation.

The feature A15 includes “information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
The variable control means includes
Variable acceptance control means (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (the normal game state by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once The function to execute the migration process), and
With
The specific state is controlled so as to end when the number of game balls entering the second ball entering part reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the predetermined number is four and the upper limit number is five or less. It can also be said. In this case, “the predetermined number is 4 and the upper limit number is 5 or less” is “the upper limit number is a number equal to or less than an addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number”. It may be replaced.

Feature A16. The variable control means includes
Variable acceptance control means (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (the normal game state by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once The function to execute the migration process), and
With
The variable acceptance control is performed so that the variable acceptance means is changed from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state becomes a predetermined upper limit period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the upper limit period is 3 seconds or less.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid ball entering the second ball portion when viewed in relation to the second determination. it can.

  In feature A16, “3 sec or less” may be read as “0.6 sec or more and 3.0 sec or less”.

The feature A16 is as follows: "The launching means can launch a game ball at a predetermined launch cycle;
Comprising information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means with a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit;
The variable control means includes
Variable acceptance control means (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means (the normal game state by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once The function to execute the migration process), and
With
The variable acceptance control is performed so that the variable acceptance means is changed from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state becomes a predetermined upper limit period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the upper limit period is a period equal to or less than a product of an addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and a firing cycle of the launching means. It can also be said. In this case, “below the product of the added value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing period of the launching means” is equal to or greater than the sum of the launching period of the launching means and 1 added to the predetermined number. It may be read as “below the product of the firing period of the launching means”.

Feature A17. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (execution determination processing for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A second entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state that is provided in the game area and that can accept or easily accept a game ball in the second entrance part, and a second state that cannot accept a game ball in the second entrance part or that is less likely to accept the first state. Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched to a state;
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and the game received in the predetermined receiving area A ball is configured to be received in the second entrance portion;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of game balls to the first ball entry section in the game area.

  In the above configuration, there is a game aiming for the game ball to enter the first ball entry part and a game aiming for the game ball to enter the second ball entry part when the variable receiving means is in the first state. Coexist. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first and second balls, the result that the game ball enters the first ball even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It becomes difficult to enter the second entrance part, and there may be a disadvantage that the player cannot fully enjoy the profit in the first state.

  In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entry portion. For this reason, the game ball that flows down toward the first incoming ball part reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first incoming ball part, and reception of the game ball is inhibited by the first incoming ball part. It is suppressed. Thereby, the entrance opportunity to the 2nd entrance part is stably ensured, and the player can properly receive the profit in the first state.

Feature A18. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for the upper working port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (execution determination processing for the upper operation port 303 by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A first state that is provided in the game area and that can accept or easily accept a game ball in the second entrance part, and a second state that cannot accept a game ball in the second entrance part or that is less likely to accept the first state. Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched to a state;
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and the game received in the predetermined receiving area A ball is configured to be received in the second entrance portion;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of game balls to the first ball entry section in the game area.

  In the above configuration, there is a game aiming for the game ball to enter the first ball entry part and a game aiming for the game ball to enter the second ball entry part when the variable receiving means is in the first state. When the game ball enters the second ball entry unit, the grant determination process is performed. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first and second balls, the result that the game ball enters the first ball even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It may be difficult to enter the second entrance part. That is, the opportunity to receive the second determination is deprived, and a disadvantage that the player cannot properly enjoy the profit in the first state may occur.

  In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entry portion. For this reason, the game ball that flows down toward the first incoming ball part reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first incoming ball part, and reception of the game ball is inhibited by the first incoming ball part. It is suppressed. Thereby, the opportunity to receive the grant determination is stably secured, and the player can properly enjoy the profit that has reached the first state.

Feature A19. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81) for acquiring first information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry unit;
First determination means for performing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means (a function for executing the determination processing for the lower working port 305 by the main control device 81);
A second entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit;
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (a function for executing the determination process for the upper working port 303 by the main control device 81);
A first state that is provided in the game area and that can accept or easily accept a game ball in the second entrance part, and a second state that cannot accept a game ball in the second entrance part or that is less likely to accept the first state. Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched to a state;
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means is provided upstream of the first ball receiving portion,
When the variable receiving means is in the first state, the gaming ball is unable to enter the first incoming portion, or the gaming ball is more than when the variable receiving means is in the second state. A gaming machine configured to be difficult to enter the first entrance part.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the variable receiving means is configured to be incapable of entering or difficult to enter the first entrance portion. This correlates with the ease of entering the first entrance part. Thereby, depending on whether the variable receiving means is in the first state or the second state, a game in which a game ball is entered into the first entrance part and a game in which the game ball is entered into the second entrance part Can be clearly separated from the player's perspective. As a result, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the first pitching portion, and to effectively pay attention to the variable receiving means and the second pitching portion. It becomes possible.

  Furthermore, since simultaneous entrance into the first and second entrance parts is suppressed, each control process required for each acquisition process for acquiring the first and second information, and a determination process corresponding to each information, It becomes possible to reduce processing load. In addition, since it is less necessary to consider the entry of game balls into the first entry part during execution of the first state, game design can be facilitated.

Feature A20. The variable receiving means includes
There are movable bodies (opening and closing members 331, 511) that can be displaced at a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position, and the movable body is in the second position. Is configured to be able to switch from the second state to the first state by being displaced from the first position to the first position,
The game according to Feature A19, wherein when the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body is configured to be able to inhibit the entry of the game ball into the first entrance portion. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, since the entrance of the game ball to the first entrance part is directly inhibited by the movable body located at the first position, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, It is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which the game ball cannot enter the first entrance part or is difficult to enter.

Feature A21. The first entrance portion is configured to open upward,
The variable receiving means is configured such that when the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body can cover at least a part of the opening of the first ball entry portion from above. The gaming machine according to Feature A20, which is characterized.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, it is easy to understand from the viewpoint of the player that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the first entrance part. Moreover, the structure which can inhibit the entrance to the 1st entrance part with a movable body is realizable in a preferable aspect.

Feature A22. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state that is provided in the game area and that can accept or easily accept a game ball in the second entrance part, and a second state that cannot accept a game ball in the second entrance part or that is less likely to accept the first state. Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched to a state;
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means is configured to form a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined receiving area is formed on a flow path (first flow path R1) of game balls to the first ball entry section in the game area.

  In the above configuration, there is a game aiming for the game ball to enter the first ball entry part and a game aiming for the game ball to enter the second ball entry part when the variable receiving means is in the first state. Coexist. Under such a configuration, depending on the positional relationship between the first and second balls, the result that the game ball enters the first ball even though the variable receiving means is in the first state. , It becomes difficult to enter the second entrance part, and there may be a disadvantage that the player cannot fully enjoy the profit in the first state.

  In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the first state, a predetermined receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means on the flow path of the game ball to the first ball entry portion. For this reason, the game ball that flows down toward the first incoming ball part reaches the variable receiving means before reaching the first incoming ball part, and reception of the game ball is inhibited by the first incoming ball part. It is suppressed. Thereby, the entrance opportunity to the 2nd entrance part is stably ensured, and the player can properly receive the profit in the first state.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched;
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state,
There are provided regulation means (second guide parts 371, 403, 451, 503, first guide part 603) capable of regulating the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the said structure, the front area | region of a variable receiving means can be utilized as an adjustment area | region which determines the flow direction of a game ball, or changes a flow direction. In this case, compared to a configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of the variable receiving means, it is possible to stabilize the flow-down mode of the game ball and diversify the movement of the game ball, improving the interest To do.

  Note that the “flow direction of the game ball” of the feature B1 is “the flow direction of the game ball in a direction other than the front-rear direction in the front view from the front of the game machine” or “the vertical direction and the left-right direction in the front view from the front of the game machine”. May be read as “flowing direction of game balls in at least one of the above”. Alternatively, after adding a configuration of “equipped with a game board (game board 24) in which the game area is formed on the front surface” to the feature B1, the “flow direction of the game ball” of the feature B1 is set to “front side of the game board”. May be read as “flowing direction of the game ball in the direction along the direction” or “flowing direction of the game ball in the direction parallel to the front surface of the game board”.

Feature B2. A first entrance portion as the entrance portion;
A second ball entrance portion (lower operating port 305) different from the first ball entrance portion provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
With
The second incoming ball portion is disposed downstream of the variable receiving means;
The game machine according to Feature B1, wherein the defining means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means to the second ball-entry portion.

  According to the said structure, the front area | region of a variable receiving means can be utilized as a guidance area | region. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the flow of the game ball to the second ball entering portion as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of the variable receiving means.

Feature B3. A game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on the front surface;
The second entrance part opens upward,
The defining means and the second ball-entry portion protrude forward from the front surface of the game board, and are spaced apart so that the distance between them is larger than the diameter of the game ball. A gaming machine according to Feature B2.

  When the game ball is guided to the second pitching part by the defining means, according to this feature, the game ball guided by the regulation means is the second using the interval between the regulation means and the second pitching part. It is possible to deviate from the route toward the entrance. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the game ball receiving the guidance from always entering the second entrance part, but also to allow the game ball not receiving the guide to enter the second entrance part. Monotonization is suppressed.

Feature B4. The variable receiving means has movable bodies (opening / closing members 331, 511) that are displaceable at a first position (open position) and a second position (closed position) different from the first position. The body is configured to be switchable from the second state to the first state by displacing from the second position to the first position,
When the movable body is located at the second position, the game ball is configured to flow down in front of the movable body,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the defining unit is configured to be able to define a flow direction of a game ball flowing down in front of the movable body located at the second position.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable receiving means is in the second state while the variable receiving means is properly in the first state, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means can be suitably defined.

Feature B5. The defining means is
The flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the movable body is configured to be able to define a predetermined direction,
A wall portion (second guide portions 371, 403, 451, 503, first guide portion 603) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position and extends in the predetermined direction is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein:

  In a configuration in which a game ball can flow down the front of the movable body located at the second position, if the game ball stays in front of the movable body, the game ball prevents the movable body from being displaced to the first position. Is concerned. In this regard, according to this feature, the game ball can flow smoothly when the flow direction of the game ball is defined, and the game ball may stagnate or rampage in front of the movable body located at the second position. Is suppressed. Thereby, it is suppressed that the stagnation game balls prevent the movable body from being displaced to the first position, and the second state of the variable receiving means is used while the front area of the variable receiving means is used as the specified area. It is possible to satisfactorily switch from the first state to the first state.

  The feature B5 may further include a feature that “the prescribed surface in the flow direction of the game ball in the wall portion is flat”. In this case, the flow of the game ball in front of the variable receiving means can be further smoothed.

  In the feature B5, the “first position” may be read as “a first position where the movable body protrudes forward from the second position”.

Feature B6. The defining means protrudes forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position,
In the feature B4 or B5, characterized in that it comprises suppression means (first guide portion 365) for suppressing the game ball flowing down the game area from coming into contact with the upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means. The gaming machine described.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area comes in contact with or rests on the upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means, the flowing speed is greatly reduced immediately before or during the passage of the movable body. Where there is a concern that the flow of the game ball is delayed in front of the movable body located at the position, according to this feature, this is suppressed by the suppression means. As a result, the displacement of the movable body to the first position is prevented from being disturbed, and the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state while using the front area of the variable receiving means as the specified area. It becomes possible to perform well.

Feature B7. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position,
The defining means includes a facing portion facing the front surface so as to be separated from the front surface of the movable body in front of the movable body located at the second position.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, wherein a distance between the facing portion and the front surface of the movable body increases as it goes downward.

  According to the above configuration, when the movable body rotates from the second position to the first position, it is possible to suppress interference between the defining means and the movable body.

  Feature B8. The opposed portion is formed in an arc shape that is convex on the opposite side of the movable body located at the second position when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation axis of the movable body, and the curvature thereof is the movable The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the gaming machine has substantially the same curvature as a turning locus of one point on the body.

  According to the said structure, a movable body can be rotated, maintaining the clearance gap of a substantially fixed magnitude | size between prescription | regulation means. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably define the flow direction in front of the movable body while suitably suppressing interference between the movable body and the defining means.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, wherein the defining means (second guide portion 371) is provided on a front surface of the movable body.

  According to the said structure, the structure which utilizes the front area | region of a variable receiving means as a prescription | regulation area | region can be implement | achieved in a practically preferable aspect. In the feature B9, “provided on the front surface of the movable body” may be read as “connected or integrally formed with the front surface of the movable body”.

Feature B10. A game part (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body and spaced from the movable body,
The game machine according to Feature B9, wherein the movable body is displaceable to the first position by rotating forward from the second position.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the defining means on the front surface of the movable body is displaced integrally with the movable body, the movable body is displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position. . Compared with the case where the movable body moves linearly in the front-rear direction, the interference of the restricting means with the game component can be mitigated, and it becomes easy to ensure a large amount of displacement of the movable body.

  In the feature B10, “the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position” is “the entrance portion is opened forward and the game is played. An opening through which a sphere can pass is provided, and the movable body can cover the opening from the front in the second position, and rotate forward from the second position to the first position. It may be read as “It is possible to displace it”.

  Feature B11. The movable body and the game component positioned at the second position are separated from each other so that the defining means and the game component do not intersect in the process of moving the movable body from the second position to the first position. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the defining means and the gaming parts from being damaged by the collision of the defining means with the preceding gaming parts.

Feature B12. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position,
Features B9 to B11 are characterized by comprising suppression means (first guide portion 365) for preventing the game ball flowing down the game area from coming into contact with the upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the configuration in which the movable body is displaced from the second position to the first position by rotating forward, when the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the defining means from above, the movable body is moved to the first position by the impact. There is a concern that the variable receiving means will be in the first state regardless of the switching control. In this regard, according to this feature, the contact of the game ball from above with the defining means is suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the variable receiving means is suppressed from unexpectedly entering the first state.

Feature B13. A game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on the front surface;
Derivation means (first guide portion 365) for leading a game ball protruding forward from the front surface of the game board and flowing down the game area to the front of the movable body located at the second position;
The derivation means is disposed above the defining means in a state where the movable body is located at the second position,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein an interval between the derivation unit and the defining unit is smaller than a diameter of the game ball.

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the front of the movable body by the derivation means, the game ball enters the entrance part when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It becomes easy to do. Further, since the deriving means is disposed above the defining means and the distance between the two means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball from the deriving means is easily guided to the defining means, and further The means can also be used as a restraining means (a means for restraining the game ball from coming into contact with the upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means).

Feature B14. The defining means (second guide portions 403, 451, and 503) are arranged from the rear of the movable body (opening / closing member 331, front wall 513 of the opening / closing member 511) located at the second position to the front of the movable body. Is extended to
The game according to any one of features B4 to B13, wherein the movable body includes an insertion portion (notch portion 411, through hole 517) through which the defining means can be inserted at least in the second position. Machine.

  According to the said structure, the structure which utilizes the front area | region of a variable receiving means as a prescription | regulation area | region can be implement | achieved in a practically preferable aspect. Furthermore, the movable body can be displaced with the defining means remaining, and the flow-down direction of the game ball can be suitably defined at either the first position or the second position.

  For feature B14, “the movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position, and is separated from the movable body in front of the movable body. The gaming parts (window panel 62) are arranged ”may be applied. In this case, since the defining means can be fixed regardless of the displacement of the movable body, the defining means can be extended forward in a range where it does not contact the game part, and the distance between the defining means and the game part can be easily adjusted. It can be less than the diameter. Thus, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the defining means, and the flow-down direction of the game ball can be preferably defined.

  Feature B15. The feature B14 according to the feature B14, further comprising suppression means (first guide portion 365) for preventing the game ball flowing down the game area from coming into contact with the upper surface of the definition means from above the definition means. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, damage to the defining means due to the abutment of the game ball on the upper surface of the defining means from above is suppressed. Furthermore, the game ball is prevented from being greatly decelerated immediately before or when it passes the front of the movable body, and the stagnation of the game ball in front of the movable body located at the second position is suppressed. . Thereby, it is suppressed that the displacement to the 1st position of a movable body is prevented by the game ball which stagnates, and it becomes possible to perform switching from the 2nd state of a variable receiving means to a 1st state favorably.

Feature B16. A game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on the front surface;
Derivation means (first guide portion 365) for leading a game ball protruding forward from the front surface of the game board and flowing down the game area to the front of the movable body located at the second position;
The derivation means is disposed above the defining means in a state where the movable body is located at the second position,
The gaming machine according to Feature B14 or B15, wherein an interval between the derivation unit and the defining unit is smaller than a diameter of a game ball.

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the front of the movable body by the derivation means, the game ball is entered into the entrance part when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. Can be made easier. Further, since the deriving means is disposed above the defining means and the distance between the two means is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball from the deriving means is easily guided to the defining means, and further It becomes possible to utilize the means as a restraining means.

  Feature B17. As the insertion part, a notch part (notch part 411) in which a part of the movable body is notched from an edge of the movable body is provided, and the defining means can be inserted through the notch part. A gaming machine according to any one of features B14 to B16.

  According to the said structure, the structure which can prescribe | regulate the flow direction of a game ball can be implement | achieved in a practically preferable aspect by a prescription | regulation means extending ahead from the back of a movable body.

  According to the above configuration, the cut-out portion can be reduced in suppressing interference between the movable body and the defining means. As a result, it is possible to suitably define the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in front of the movable body while suppressing a decrease in rigidity and strength of the movable body.

  Feature B18. Any of the features B14 to B17, wherein the insertion portion includes a through hole (through hole 517) penetrating the movable body in the front-rear direction, and the defining means can be inserted through the through hole. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the said structure, the structure which can prescribe | regulate the flow direction of a game ball can be implement | achieved in a practically preferable aspect by a prescription | regulation means extending ahead from the back of a movable body.

Feature B19. The entrance portion includes an opening that opens forward and allows a game ball to pass through.
The movable body is
A wall (front wall 513) capable of covering the opening from the front in the second position;
An extension part (extension part 515) extending rearward from the back surface of the wall part;
With
The gaming machine according to feature B18, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position by linearly moving in the front-rear direction.

  In the configuration in which the defining means is inserted through the through hole of the movable body, the movable body is displaced to the first position and the second position by the rotation, so that the through hole is avoided in order to avoid interference between the defining means and the movable body. There is a concern that the rigidity and strength of the movable body may be reduced. In this respect, according to this feature, the movable body is displaced to the first position and the second position by the linear movement in the front-rear direction, so that the enlargement of the through hole is suppressed, and the above inconvenience can be preferably solved. become. Furthermore, in this feature, when the movable body is displaced to the first position, the extending portion functions as a ball receiving portion that receives a game ball from above. As a result, it is possible to properly receive game balls flowing down the game area. In addition, since the opening is covered by the wall when the movable body is in the second position, even if the flow direction of the game ball changes due to a collision with the defining means, Dive is suppressed.

Feature B20. A protrusion (first guide portion 603) provided in the game area around the movable body and projecting forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position;
The features B4 to B19 are characterized in that the projecting portion extends to at least the front of the movable body located at the second position in a front view from the front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, a continuous defined path can be constructed across the peripheral area of the movable body and the front area of the movable body, and the flow of game balls can be suitably defined. In addition, since the defining means can be provided so as to be integrally formed with the peripheral member of the movable body, the strength and rigidity of the defining means can be increased compared to the case where the defining means is provided independently in front of the movable body. Is possible.

Feature B21. A game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on the front surface;
When the movable body is positioned at the second position, the front surface of the movable body is substantially flush with the front surface of the game board or behind the front surface of the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B20.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball flowing down the game area is caught by the movable body when entering the front of the movable body, and it is suppressed that the flow of the game ball is stagnated or the movable body is damaged.

  Note that the “front surface of the game board” of the feature B21 is also understood as the front surface of the base body in a configuration in which the movable body is provided on the base body and a game ball can flow down the front of the base body. Can do.

Feature B22. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part; and a second state that cannot accept the game ball in the second entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. , Variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be switched to,
Variable control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
When the variable receiving means is in the second state, the game ball is configured to be able to flow forward.
A gaming machine comprising changing means capable of changing a flow direction of a game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state.

  According to the said structure, the front area | region of a variable receiving means can be utilized as a change area | region which changes the flow-down direction of a game ball. In this case, the movement of the game ball can be diversified as compared with the configuration in which the game ball only passes in front of the variable receiving means, and the interest is improved. Note that each configuration described in any of the features B2 to B21 can be applied to this feature. In this case, the “defining means” in each configuration can be read as “changing means”.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (execution determination processing for the upper operation port 303 by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, variable control means for executing switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state (execution of electric power support processing by the main controller 81) Function)
Notification control means for controlling that specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control is executed by a predetermined notification means (first light emitting unit 311) (function to execute processing during normal map change by the effect control device 82) )When,
With
The predetermined notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, and is configured to allow the game ball to flow down in front of the game ball.
The notification control means includes means for enabling the specific notification to be executed before switching to the first state when the switching control is executed by the variable control means. .

  In the above configuration, since the determination of grant is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the ball entrance unit. Under such a premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the predetermined notification means, and the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured to execute. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the sense of expectation that the game ball will enter the entrance portion is enhanced. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and the game ball can flow down in front of it. For this reason, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide a game that enjoys whether or not the game ball that has passed in front of the notification means enters the entrance part, and the interest is improved.

  In addition, since the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball, the flow path can be used not only as the flow area of the game ball but also as the notification area. In this case, compared to a configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are different from each other, it is easy to secure a large flow-down area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the predetermined notifying means is provided upstream of the variable receiving means in the gaming area and around the variable receiving means.

  According to the above configuration, the three members of the notification unit, the game ball, and the variable receiving unit can be simultaneously recognized, and the attention points of the player can be collected. This makes it easier to grasp the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means and the movement of the variable receiving means while paying attention to the specific notification. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow from the start of specific notification until the game ball enters the entrance part as a series, and it is possible to realize a game effect in which the notification means and variable reception means are linked. Become.

Feature C3. A game ball that flows down the first flow path (first flow path R1) and a game ball that flows down a second flow path (second flow path R2) different from the first flow path reach the variable receiving means. Configured to be possible,
The gaming machine according to C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined notifying unit is provided on each of the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball can reach the variable receiving means through the plurality of flow paths, the flow of the game balls to the variable receiving means is not unified, and monotonization of the game is suppressed. The In addition, there is a concern that the visibility of the specific notification may be reduced due to the game ball flowing down in front of the notification means. In this feature, since the notification means is provided on each flow path, a single flow path is provided. Even if the visibility of the specific notification is reduced due to the game ball flowing down, it is possible to grasp the specific notification through another flow path. As a result, it is possible to preferably eliminate the inconvenience that the specific notification is difficult to grasp due to the passage of the game ball, and it is possible to preferably make the flow area and the notification area compatible with each other.

Feature C4. The first flow path and the second flow path are adjacent to each other;
The gaming machine according to C3, wherein the predetermined notifying unit is provided so as to straddle the first downflow path and the second downflow path.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball is flowing down one flow path, it is possible to grasp the specific notification only by slightly shifting the line of sight. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means and the specific notification at the same time, and it is possible to suppress the presence or absence of the ball entering the ball entering portion and the oversight of the specific notification.

Feature C5. The predetermined notification means includes light emitting means capable of emitting light (first light emitting unit 311),
The notification control means includes a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means so as to execute a predetermined light emission effect as the specific notification (a function for executing processing during normal map change by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

  In the above configuration, specific notification is performed by the presence or absence of light emission of the light emitting means, the change of the light emission color, or the like. In this case, the specific notification can be performed with simple contents as compared with the case where the effect is configured by moving image display using the display device. For this reason, even if the game ball flows down in front of the notification means, it becomes easy to understand the notification contents, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized in order to make the flow area and the notification area compatible.

Feature C6. The light emitting means includes
A light emitter (light emitter 360) capable of emitting light toward the front;
A light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 341) that is disposed in front of the light emitter and through which the game ball can flow down;
With
The translucent part is characterized in that at least a region of the front surface that overlaps the flow path is flat, and includes a diffusion part that diffuses light from the light emitter behind the front surface. A gaming machine according to Feature C5.

  According to the said structure, in the structure which made the flow-down area | region and the notification area compatible, the light of a light-emitting body can be diffused and irradiated ahead, smoothing the flow of the game ball in front of a translucent part. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect without hindering the flow of game balls.

Feature C7. The predetermined notification means includes
A first light emitting means (first light emitting unit 311) as the light emitting means;
A second light emitting unit (second light emitting unit 317) disposed around the first light emitting unit and capable of emitting light;
With
The first light emitting means is configured such that a game ball can flow down in front of the first light emitting means,
The second light emitting means is configured such that a game ball cannot flow down in front of the second light emitting means or is less likely to flow down than the first light emitting means,
When the predetermined light emission effect is executed, the first light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting mode, and the second light emitting unit emits light in a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or C6, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be possible.

  In the above configuration, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means arranged around the first light emitting means are provided, and each light emitting means can emit light in different light emission modes when executing a predetermined light emission effect. ing. Thereby, each light emission means can be made to emit light in the light emission mode according to the difference in characteristics of whether or not the game ball flows down in front (whether it is easy to flow down). For example, for the first light emitting means that allows a game ball to flow down in front, the second light emitting means that emits light in a light emitting mode that places importance on the visibility of the game ball, while the game ball cannot flow down or is difficult to flow down, Light can be emitted in a light emission mode that places importance on attracting the player's interest. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the flow of the game ball flowing down in front of the notification means while directing the player's attention to the specific notification.

  Feature C8. The game according to any one of features C1 to C7, further comprising guide means (first guide portion 365) capable of guiding the game ball flowing down in front of the predetermined notification means to the variable receiving means. Machine.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the game ball can easily enter the entrance portion, and the flow of the game ball in front of the notification means can be stabilized. . Thereby, it is suppressed that the game ball is exposed in front of the notification means and the visibility of the specific notification is lowered.

Feature C9. The predetermined notification means includes light emitting means capable of emitting light (first light emitting unit 311),
The notification control means includes a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means so as to execute a predetermined light emission effect as the specific notification (a function for executing processing during normal map change by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein the guide means is light transmissive.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to utilize a guidance means as an alerting | reporting area | region, and the fall of the visibility of the specific alerting | reporting by a guidance means is suppressed.

  When this feature is applied to any of the features C5 to C7 via the feature C8, the feature may be that the guide means is provided in the light emitting means and has light transparency. . In this case, the effect that “the guiding means can be used as part of the light emitting means and the visibility of the specific notification is improved” is expected.

Feature C10. The predetermined notification means is provided as a first notification means,
The game notification operation corresponding to a determination result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is ended as one game time by starting a game rotation operation by a second notification device different from the first notification device. The game times control means for controlling the game times for each game time to be performed (functions for executing game times control processing by the main control device 81) are provided. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the notification regarding the game turn operation in which the determination result of the grant determination unit is reflected and the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving unit are performed by each separate notification unit. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing both notifications, and to prompt the user to grasp the appropriate contents of each notification.

Feature C11. The variable receiving means is disposed below the second notification means,
The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein the first notification unit is disposed between the second notification unit and the variable receiving unit.

  According to the above configuration, while the player is paying attention to the second notification means, the line of sight is moved to the first notification means when the specific notification is executed by the first notification means, and then the flow of the game ball is followed. The line of sight may be shifted to the variable receiving means. That is, it is possible to visually recognize the first notification unit and the variable receiving unit in an appropriate order by the downward natural line-of-sight movement starting from the second notification unit, thereby facilitating the understanding of effects.

Feature C12. As a gaming state, at least a first gaming state (high frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the variable receiving means is less likely to be the first state than the first gaming state. Have
The variable control means includes means for executing the switching control based on a predetermined switching condition being established in the second gaming state,
The notification control means is configured so that the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state when the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, further comprising means for controlling predetermined notification means.

  In the second gaming state, since the frequency at which the variable receiving means is switched to the first state is low, the player's interest in the variable receiving means is diminished, and there is a concern that the player may become difficult to notice when switching to the first state. . In this regard, according to this feature, since the specific notification is executed when the switching to the first state is performed in the second gaming state, it becomes easier for the player to notice the switching to the first state, Ease is improved.

Feature C13. The variable control means includes
A mode determining means for determining a mode of the first state executed in the switching control;
Means for executing the switching control in a mode determined by the mode determination unit based on the establishment of the predetermined switching condition;
With
The mode of the first state that can be determined by the mode determining means includes a first mode (low winning support state) and a second mode (first mode) in which the game ball can be easily received in the pitched part as compared to the first mode. High-winning support status), and
The notification control means includes means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is performed when the switching control is executed according to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of C12.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed when the variable receiving means is controlled to be switched in the second mode in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball-entry unit, the player is notified based on the specific notification. When a game ball is launched so as to aim at the variable receiving means, it becomes easy to sense the return (entrance to the entrance part). Thereby, the interest degree with respect to specific alerting | reporting can be raised, and it becomes possible to improve a production effect.

Feature C14. A second entrance part (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for through by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second pitching section;
Second determination means for determining whether or not the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined second grant information (a general game game by the main control device 81). Control processing)
With
The variable control means is based on the result of the second assignment determination by the second determination means being the second correspondence result that the second information to be judged corresponds to the second assignment information. , Configured to execute the switching control,
The notification control means sets the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is started before the switch control is executed by the variable control means after the second determination is made by the second determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized in that it comprises means for controlling.

  According to the above configuration, when the switching control of the variable acceptance means is performed based on the determination result of the second grant determination, the specific notification is made before the variable acceptance means is switched to the first state after the second grant determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the specific notification before switching to the first state while matching with the execution mode of the switching control.

Feature C15. A second entrance part (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for through by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on the entry of the game ball into the second pitching section;
Second information storage means (electric role holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
Second determination means for making a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to predetermined second provision information (a normal operation by the main controller 81). A function for executing game times control processing), and
For the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the second grant determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second grant determination, A destination specifying means for specifying the second information at a timing earlier than the second grant determination target;
With
The variable control means is based on the result of the second assignment determination by the second determination means being the second correspondence result that the second information to be judged corresponds to the second assignment information. , Configured to execute the switching control,
Any of the features C1 to C14, wherein the notification control means includes means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is executed based on a specification result of the destination specifying means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to ensure a long notification period for specific notification while starting specific notification before switching to the first state. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the specific notification, or to diversify the specific notification mode and enhance the effect.

Feature C16. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined grant information (execution determination processing for the upper operation port 303 by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, variable control means for executing switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state (execution of electric power support processing by the main controller 81) Function)
Notification control means for controlling that specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control is executed by a predetermined notification means (first light emitting unit 311) (function to execute processing during normal map change by the effect control device 82) )When,
With
The predetermined notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means in the game area, the game ball can flow down the rear, and the rear can be seen from the front of the gaming machine Has been
The notification control means includes means for enabling the specific notification to be executed before switching to the first state when the switching control is executed by the variable control means. .

  In the above configuration, since the determination of grant is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the ball entrance unit. Under such a premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the predetermined notification means, and the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured to execute. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the sense of expectation that the game ball will enter the entrance portion is enhanced. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, the game ball can flow down the rear, and the rear can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is said. For this reason, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that enjoys whether or not a game ball that has passed through the back of the notification means enters the entrance part, and the interest is improved.

  In addition, since the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball, the flow path can be used not only as the flow area of the game ball but also as the notification area. In this case, compared to a configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are different from each other, it is easy to secure a large flow-down area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

Feature C17. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Privilege granting means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 307) that can be replaced;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition, variable control means for executing switching control for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state (execution of electric power support processing by the main controller 81) Function)
Notification control means (a function for executing the processing during normal map change by the effect control device 82) for controlling the specific notification according to the execution mode of the switching control to be executed by a predetermined notification means;
With
The predetermined notification means is provided on the flow path of the game balls to the variable receiving means in the game area, and the game balls can flow down at least one of the front and rear thereof.
The game control means includes a means for enabling the specific notification to be executed before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.

  In the above configuration, since a privilege is given based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball enters the ball entrance unit. Under such a premise, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed by the notification means, and the specific notification is executed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is configured. For this reason, it becomes possible for the player to predict the occurrence of the first state in advance, and the sense of expectation that the game ball will enter the entrance portion is enhanced. In addition, in this feature, the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball to the variable receiving means, and at least one of the front and rear of the notification ball can flow down. For this reason, the player can grasp the specific notification while visually recognizing the flow of the game ball to the variable receiving means. Thereby, not only can a player be provided with a preparation period for launching a game ball aiming at the variable receiving means, but also a game that enjoys whether or not a game ball that has passed in front of the notification means enters the entrance part. It becomes possible to provide sex, and interest is improved.

  In addition, since the notification means is provided on the flow path of the game ball, the flow path can be used not only as the flow area of the game ball but also as the notification area. In this case, compared to a configuration in which the flow-down area and the notification area are different from each other, it is easy to secure a large flow-down area, and it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information (whether or not determination processing for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
The game times of each game time are set as one game time when the game time operation is started by a predetermined notification means, and the game time operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing by the main control device 81) for controlling the operation to be performed,
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched;
Variable control means for performing variable acceptance control for changing the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for shifting to a specific state (first high-winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed a plurality of times (normal game state transition by the main controller 81) Processing function), and
With
In the variable acceptance control that is executed a plurality of times in the specific state, when a game ball enters the entrance part in the execution of the variable acceptance control, the game times corresponding to the entrance A game machine that is configured to be able to execute the variable acceptance control after the end of the game corresponding to a game of entering.

  According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, and the special information is stored in the information storage unit. And the grant determination process of whether the special information memorize | stored in the information storage means respond | corresponds to grant information is performed, and also game times are performed corresponding to the said grant determination process. In this configuration, the number of special information stored in the information storage means decreases as the game times are executed, and accordingly, a free area in which new special information can be stored increases. Assuming such a configuration, this feature supports entry when a game ball enters the entrance part in the previous execution of variable acceptance control in multiple variable acceptance control executed in a specific state. It is configured to be able to execute later variable acceptance control after the game round is completed.

  For example, if a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit in the execution of the variable acceptance control earlier, if the game-ready game times continue until the end of the specific state, it is specified from the start of the game time. Until the end of the state, no new free space is generated in the information storage means. For this reason, during the transition to the specific state, it is assumed that after the number of stored information storage means reaches the upper limit, the player's interest in entering the entrance into the ingress unit is diminished. In addition, since no new free space is generated in the information storage means, at most, only the grant determination opportunity for the total number of executions of the grant determination based on the first entry and the upper limit storage number of special information is acquired. There is also a concern that this is not possible.

  In this regard, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entry part during the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control, the game play corresponding to the ball is terminated, It becomes possible to start the next game round. As a result, it is possible to start the later variable acceptance control after increasing the free space of the information storage means, and there is a willingness to enter the entering part during the subsequent execution of the variable acceptance control. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in entering the entrance part throughout the specific state. Furthermore, it is possible to acquire the number of grant determination opportunities that exceeds the total of the execution determination of the grant based on the first entry and the upper limit storage number of special information. Thereby, the pleasure which aims at making many game balls enter the entrance part during a specific state is strengthened, and the interest property of a specific state improves.

Feature D2. The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state (high frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the variable receiving means is less likely to be in the first state than the first gaming state. And
The transition condition is configured to be established in the second gaming state,
In the specific state executed in the second game state, when a game ball enters the entrance part by the execution of the variable acceptance control, after the end of the entrance game game, The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the variable acceptance control is configured to be executable.

  In the first gaming state that is likely to be in the first state, the control state of the variable receiving means (referred to as a support state for convenience) in which one or more variable reception controls are set as one set is easily repeated at short intervals. Even if the number of grant determination opportunities is small in the support state, the player's psychology that the shortage can be compensated for in the next support state works. On the other hand, in the second gaming state that is difficult to be set to the first state, the period from when the support state ends to when the next support state occurs tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect supplementation of the grant determination opportunity. For this reason, unlike the case of the first gaming state, there is a strong need to acquire more grant determination opportunities in one support state. In this regard, in this feature, a specific state in which variable acceptance control is performed a plurality of times occurs in the second gaming state, and this specific state is configured as the feature D1. Thereby, it can be set as the structure suitable for a player's needs, and it becomes possible to raise the charm of a specific state effectively.

Feature D3. In the specific state, the variable control means includes a variable control period (a first release period and a first waiting period) from when the previous variable acceptance control is started to when the subsequent variable acceptance control is started. Variable control period setting means for setting the total)
The game times control means comprises operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game times operation (game time variation display time of the second special figure),
The operation period setting means includes means capable of setting a period shorter than the variable control period set by the variable control period setting means as the operation period of the game for playing balls. A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball has entered the entrance part by executing the previous variable acceptance control, the subsequent variable acceptance control can be executed after the completion of the game corresponding to the entrance.

  Feature D4. The operation period setting means is shorter than the variable control period set by the variable control period setting means as the operation period of the pitch-corresponding game times, and the previous variable acceptance control is started. The gaming machine according to feature D3, further comprising means capable of setting a period longer than a period from a midway timing to a time when the subsequent variable acceptance control is started.

  According to the above-described configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry section between the start of the previous variable acceptance control and the midway timing, the game corresponding to the game finishes before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. On the other hand, if the ball is entered after the midway timing, it is difficult to finish the game round before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. That is, the ease with which a free space is generated before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control differs depending on the ball entry timing. As a result, the pleasure of aiming to enter the ball at an early stage of the variable acceptance control is added, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

Feature D5. The game times control means includes:
A selection means for selecting one from a plurality of predetermined game times;
Game time period setting means for setting the game time period selected by the selection means as an operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation;
With
The plurality of game times periods include a first game time period and a second game time period longer than the first game time period,
The gaming machine according to claim D3 or D4, wherein the first game turn period is shorter than the variable control period, and the second game turn period is longer than the variable control period. .

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the game turn is ended before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control is made different depending on the selection result of the selection means. As compared with the case where the game times are always finished before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control, monotonization of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the selection probability of the first game times period is higher than the selection probability of the second game times period.

  According to the above configuration, it becomes easier for the player to experience a game in which the game times end before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. As a result, it becomes easy to receive a profit when a specific state occurs, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the specific state.

Feature D7. The game times control means comprises operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game times operation (game time variation display time of the second special figure),
The operation period setting means sets the first period as the operation period when the number of special information stored in the information storage means is the first storage number, and the number of special information stored in the information storage means is Means for setting a second period different from the first period as the operation period when the second stored number is different from the first stored number;
When the second period is set as the operation period of the game for playing balls, the variable acceptance control after execution of the game for playing balls is configured to be executable. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

  According to the above configuration, depending on the number of special information stored in the information storage means, whether or not the game round ends before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control is different, and the number of special information stored is the second number stored. In this case, the game times are easily completed before the subsequent variable acceptance control is executed. As a result, when the specific state is started, the pleasure of aiming to enter the ball entering unit is added so that the number of stored special information becomes the second stored number, and the interest of the specific state is improved.

  Feature D8. The variable control means is a means for causing the execution period (open period) of the first state of the previous variable acceptance control to be longer than the execution period of the first state of the subsequent variable acceptance control in the specific state. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to increase the number of special information stored in the previous variable acceptance control. As a result, the previous variable acceptance control can be used as an opportunity to store the number of stored special information, and the subsequent variable acceptance control can be used as an opportunity to supplement the consumption up to that point. In this case, since the player can acquire a certain number of memories in the previous variable acceptance control, the player can enjoy a certain level of profit by executing the previous variable acceptance control. Thereby, as a result of obtaining a satisfactory satisfaction, a psychological margin for enjoying whether or not the consumption can be replenished by the subsequent variable acceptance control is easily generated, and the playability in a specific state is improved.

  Feature D9. The variable control means includes means for making the execution period of the first state of the variable acceptance control first performed in the specific state the longest, according to any one of the features D1 to D8. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to increase the number of special information stored in the first variable acceptance control. In this case, the player can obtain a certain number of memories by the first variable acceptance control, and thus can enjoy a certain level of profit at the initial stage of the specific state. Accordingly, as a result of obtaining a satisfactory satisfaction, a psychological margin for enjoying whether or not the consumption can be replenished by subsequent variable acceptance control is easily generated, and the ease of playing in a specific state is improved.

Feature D10. The variable control means sets a control period for setting a control period (first waiting period) from the end of the previous variable acceptance control to the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control in the specific state. With means,
The game times control means comprises operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game times operation (game time variation display time of the second special figure),
The operation period setting means includes means capable of setting a period shorter than the control period set by the control period setting means as the operation period of the game for playing balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the entrance part during execution of the previous variable acceptance control, if the game corresponding to the entrance is started before the end of the previous variable acceptance control, the game Can be reliably terminated before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control.

  Feature D11. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the subsequent variable acceptance control is the variable acceptance control performed next time of the previous variable acceptance control.

  According to the above-described configuration, when a game ball enters the entrance part in the previous execution of the variable acceptance control, it is possible to finish the game corresponding to the entrance before starting the next variable acceptance control. . Thereby, in a specific state, it becomes possible for a player to efficiently acquire an opportunity for grant determination.

Feature D12. A first entrance portion (upper working port 303) as the entrance portion;
First information storage means (second result display section holding area Rb) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as first information;
A second ball entrance portion (lower operating port 305) different from the first ball entrance portion provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on a game ball entering the two ball entry units;
Second information storage means (first result display holding area Ra) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
Second grant determination means (main control device 81) for performing a second grant determination process as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the grant information or different grant information. A function for executing the determination processing for the lower working port 305 by the
In a situation where the first information is stored in the first information storage unit and the second information is stored in the second information storage unit, the second grant determination is performed with priority over the grant determination. Priority means (function to execute a winning process by the main controller 81),
A gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D11, comprising:

  In the above-described configuration, the former is preferentially performed in the configuration including the provision determination process for the first entrance part and the provision determination process for the second entrance part. Thereby, when a game ball enters the first entrance part, it becomes easy to quickly perform a game turn corresponding to the entrance, and each effect in each configuration described in any of the features D1 to D11 above Becomes easier to obtain.

Feature D13. As the end condition for the specific state, a first condition in which the number of game balls entering the ball-entry unit becomes a predetermined upper limit number, and the variable acceptance control for a predetermined upper limit execution count is completed. 2 conditions are set,
The specific state is controlled to be terminated when at least one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the upper limit number is set to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit execution count.

  For example, in a configuration in which the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit execution count, the number of executions of the variable acceptance control when one game ball enters the entrance portion for one variable acceptance control in a specific state. The specific state ends before the upper limit number of executions is reached, and there is a possibility that the specific state cannot be enjoyed to the end. In this respect, according to this feature, the upper limit number is set to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit execution count, and thus the above inconvenience can be preferably solved.

Feature D14. The launching means is capable of launching a game ball at a predetermined launch cycle,
The information storage means can store special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
The variable acceptance control is performed so as to change the variable acceptance means from the first state to the second state when the execution period of the first state reaches a predetermined upper limit period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D13, wherein the upper limit period is a period equal to or less than a product of an addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and a firing cycle of the launching means.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid ball entry into the ball entry portion when viewed in relation to the grant determination.

  In addition, in the above feature D14, “the product of the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing cycle of the launching unit” is “an addition that is equal to or greater than the firing cycle of the launching unit and 1 is added to the predetermined number” Or less than the product of the value and the firing period of the launching means ”. Further, “a period equal to or less than the product of the addition value obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number and the firing period of the launching unit” may be set to “3 sec or less”, and further, “0.6 sec or more and 3.0 sec or less. It is good also as.

Feature D15. A ball entry part (upper operation port 303) in which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Control means (a function for executing game times control processing by the main control device 81) for controlling a game effect to be performed by a predetermined effect means based on the special information stored in the information storage means;
Variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state in which the game ball can be received or easily received in the entrance part and a second state in which the game ball cannot be received or is less likely to be received in the entrance part. (Electric accessory 307),
Variable control means for performing variable acceptance control for changing the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for shifting to a specific state (first high-winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed a plurality of times (normal game state transition by the main controller 81) Processing function), and
With
In the plurality of variable acceptance controls executed in the specific state, when a game ball enters the entrance part in the execution of the variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the entrance A game machine configured to be able to execute the variable acceptance control after the end of the game.

  According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, and the special information is stored in the information storage unit. And a game effect is performed based on the special information memorize | stored in the information storage means. In this configuration, the number of special information stored in the information storage means decreases in accordance with the execution of the game effect, and accordingly, a free area where new special information can be stored increases. Assuming such a configuration, in this feature, in a plurality of variable acceptance control executed in a specific state, when a game ball enters the entrance part in the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, After completion of the game effect corresponding to, it is configured to be able to execute the later variable acceptance control.

  For example, when a game ball enters the entrance part by the execution of the variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the entrance continues until the end of the specific state. No new free space is generated in the information storage means from the start to the end of the specific state. For this reason, during the transition to the specific state, it is assumed that after the number of stored information storage means reaches the upper limit, the player's interest in entering the entrance into the ingress unit is diminished. Furthermore, since no new free space is generated in the information storage means, at most, the opportunity for executing the game effect for the total number of the game effect execution based on the first entry and the upper limit storage number of the special information. There is also a concern that it can only be acquired.

  In this regard, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entry part during the execution of the previous variable acceptance control, the game effect corresponding to the entry is provided before the start of the subsequent variable acceptance control. It is possible to end and start the next game effect. As a result, it is possible to start the later variable acceptance control after increasing the free space of the information storage means, and there is a willingness to enter the entering part during the subsequent execution of the variable acceptance control. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in entering the entrance part throughout the specific state. Furthermore, it is possible to acquire game execution execution opportunities that exceed the total of the execution determination of the grant based on the first entry and the upper limit storage number of special information. Thereby, the pleasure which aims at making many game balls enter the entrance part during a specific state is strengthened, and the interest property of a specific state improves.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information (whether or not determination processing for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched;
Variable control means (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable reception means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
A notification control means (a process during the support state by the effect control device 82 is executed) for controlling the specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function), and
The notification control means includes
Grasping means for grasping the storage status of the special information in the information storage means (function for executing the processes of steps S2501 to S2503 and S2504 to S2508 by the effect control device 82);
And a changing unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the production control device 82) that changes the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping result of the grasping unit. Gaming machine.

  In the above configuration, the special information is stored in the information storage unit based on the game ball entering the pitching unit, and the grant determination is performed using the special information stored in the information storage unit. Is performed within a range where special information can be stored in the information storage means. For this reason, even if a game ball is made to enter the ball entry part beyond the range that can be stored in the information storage means, the ball entry is not linked to the grant determination. Under such circumstances, in a configuration in which the switching control of the variable receiving means is performed, the variable receiving means is switched to the first state and the information storage means is special in order to efficiently enter the ball entering portion. When information can be stored, it is desirable to enter the entrance part, and in other cases it is desirable to refrain from entering. However, if the player tries to make such a decision at the discretion of the player, the player needs to always pay attention not only to the status of the variable receiving means but also to the storage status of the information storage means, and the attention is distracted. It tends to be.

  In this regard, in this feature, the specific notification corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means is performed, and the execution mode of the specific notification can be changed according to the storage status of the information storage means. That is, in the specific notification, a correlation is generated for both the execution mode of the switching control of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means. Therefore, even if the player does not grasp the switching status of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means, if the player proceeds with the game with reference to the specific notification, the player will naturally play the game based on those situations. And can be done. As a result, distraction is suppressed, and it is possible to increase concentration on the game. In addition, the degree of attention to the specific notification can be improved, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Feature E2. The information storage means is configured to be able to store special information with a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
The grasping means comprises storage number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the information storage means or the remaining storable number up to the predetermined number,
The game machine according to Feature E1, wherein the changing means includes means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping result of the memory number grasping means.

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification can be correlated with the number of special information stored or the remaining number of memories that can be stored up to a predetermined number, and the game is performed based on the switching status of the variable receiving means and the number of special information stored. be able to.

  Feature E3. The changing means includes means for changing a specific notification execution mode based on whether or not the number of stored special information grasped by the memory number grasping means has reached the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature E2.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the execution mode of the specific notification depending on whether or not the number of special information stored has reached the upper limit number, and store the special information when the variable receiving means is switched. You can play games using the maximum possible number.

  Feature E4. When the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation, the changing means performs the specific notification in the first mode (first special display effect S1), and the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation. Means for preventing the specific notification from being performed in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode when the second situation is different from The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification mode and the presence / absence of specific notification can be switched in accordance with the transition between the switching status of the variable receiving means and the storage status of the information storage means, and specific notification suitable for each situation is performed. It becomes possible.

  Feature E5. The first aspect includes notification of an aspect that suggests that the variable receiving means switches from the second state to the first state or that prompts the player to aim at the variable receiving means. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, each status of the variable receiving means and the information storage means can be obtained by the first mode being an indication of switching to the first state of the variable receiving unit and a notification of a mode for prompting the variable receiving unit to aim. The game progress of the player can be assisted while taking this into consideration.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the first aspect includes notification according to a remaining storable number of special information stored in the information storage unit.

  According to the above configuration, the remaining storable number can be notified by the specific notification, and the game can be advanced while grasping the remaining storable number even if the player concentrates on the specific notification.

Feature E7. A firing operation means (launching handle 54) for performing the predetermined firing operation by a player;
The launching means launches a game ball so that the game ball flows down the first area (left side area PE2) in the game area when a launch operation is performed with respect to the launch operation means with a first operation amount. When the shooting operation is performed with the second operation amount with respect to the shooting operation means, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the second area (right side area PE3) in the game area. Yes,
The variable receiving means is configured to be able to receive or easily receive a game ball flowing down the second region when the second state is switched to the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E6, wherein the first mode is a notification (right-handed notification) of a mode that suggests that the second region should flow down.

  According to the above configuration, the player's launch operation can be assisted by the specific notification, and it becomes easy to play a game suitable for each situation of the variable receiving means and the information storage means.

  Feature E8. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the second mode includes a notification of a mode that prompts the player to wait for a game or stop the launch of a game ball.

  According to the above configuration, the second mode is a notification of a mode that prompts the game standby and the stop of the game ball to be fired, thereby assisting the player in the progress of the game while taking into account the status of the variable receiving unit and the information storage unit. Can do.

Feature E9. The notification control means controls the specific notification to be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the grasping means includes means for grasping a storage state of the special information of the information storage means at the predetermined timing.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance, and the player can launch the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means. It becomes possible to carry out at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, in order to grasp the storage status of the information storage means at the specific notification execution timing, the specific notification reflecting the latest storage status can be performed, and the reliability and the degree of interest in the specific notification can be increased. .

Feature E10. The variable control means includes
Variable control means for performing variable acceptance control for changing the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state (function for executing the accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, state transition means for shifting to a specific state (first high winning support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed at least once (a normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
With
The notification control means includes means for controlling the specific notification to be performed in a standby period (opening period, first standby period, second standby period) immediately before the variable acceptance control. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

  According to the said structure, specific alerting | reporting is performed using the waiting period of a specific state. As a result, the specific notification can be used as an effect in the specific state, and the interest in the specific state can be improved. Furthermore, since the specific notification is performed in the standby period immediately before the variable acceptance control, the specific notification according to the execution mode of the latest variable acceptance control can be performed, and the playability is improved.

Feature E11. The notification control means controls the specific notification to be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.
The grasping means is a change grasping means (step by the effect control device 82) for grasping a change in the storage status that occurs until the variable receiving means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of executing the processing of S2505 to S2508.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed before the variable receiving means is switched to the first state, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance, and the player can launch the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means. It becomes possible to carry out at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, after the predetermined timing, in order to grasp the change in the storage state that occurs until the variable receiving means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state, the switching control is not limited to the specific notification execution timing. It is possible to perform specific notification that takes into account the change in the storage status until the end of.

  In the feature E11, “the variable receiving means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state”, “from the predetermined timing, the variable receiving means has the first state. It may be read as “occurs during the period from the second state to the first state and thereafter to the second state”.

Feature E12. The changing means is
When the grasping result of the change grasping means is a first specific situation, the specific notification is performed in the first mode, and the grasping result of the change grasping means is a second specific situation different from the first specific situation. In this case, the specific notification is performed in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode, or means for preventing the specific notification from being performed (step S2505 by the effect control device 82). -The function of executing the processing of S2509).

  According to the above configuration, the mode of specific notification and the presence / absence of specific notification can be switched in accordance with changes in the storage status until the switching control is completed, and specific notification suitable for each situation can be performed. .

  Feature E13. The change grasping means comprises means for grasping a decrease in the number of special information stored before the variable receiving means is brought into the second state in the information storage means. A gaming machine according to E12.

  According to the above configuration, even if there is no allowance for storing special information at the time of execution of the specific notification, if there is a situation in which there is a margin before the switching control ends, notification based on that can be performed. As a result, it is possible to favorably assist the efficient entry to the entry part, and the interest is improved.

Feature E14. The game turn operation is started by the notification means different from the predetermined notification means or the notification means, and the game turn operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. A game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process for the upper working port 303 by the main control device 81) for controlling the game times for each game time to be performed,
The change grasping means is:
A remaining period grasping means (function for executing the process of step S2507 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the remaining period of the game times being executed at the predetermined timing;
Based on the remaining period grasped by the remaining period grasping means, a determination means for starting (determining whether or not the next game round is started before the variable receiving means is brought into the second state) A function of executing the processing of step S2508 by the production control device 82),
With
The gaming machine according to feature E13, characterized in that the decrease in the number of memories is grasped based on a determination result of the start determination unit.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately grasp the decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs between the time when the variable receiving means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state.

Feature E15. The first game time is that the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or notifying means different from the notifying means, and the game turning operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. 1st game time control means (control function for executing the game time control process for the upper operation port 303 by the main control device 81) for controlling the game time operation of each first game time as one time When,
A second entry portion (lower operation port 305) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Second information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81) for acquiring second special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit;
Second grant determination means for performing second grant determination based on the second special information acquired by the second information acquisition means (a function for executing a determination process for the lower working port 305 by the main control device 81);
The game notification operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game rotation operation ends as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the second grant determination. As one game time, second game time control means for controlling the game time operation of each second game time (the game time control process for the lower operation port 305 by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
With
The change grasping means is:
Execution status grasping means for grasping the execution status of the second game times at the predetermined timing (function to execute the process of step S2505 by the effect control device 82);
A remaining period grasping means for grasping a remaining period of the second game number when the second game number is being executed at the predetermined timing (a function of executing the process of step S2506 by the effect control device 82);
Based on the remaining period grasped by the remaining period grasping means, a start determining means for determining whether or not the first game round is started before the variable receiving means is brought into the second state. A function of executing the processing of step S2508 by the production control device 82),
With
The gaming machine according to feature E13 or E14, characterized in that the decrease in the number of memories is grasped based on a determination result of the start determination unit.

  According to the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine that includes a plurality of entrance parts of the entrance part and the second entrance part, and that performs the determination of the grant and the game times corresponding to the entrance to each entrance part, It is possible to preferably grasp the decrease in the number of stored special information that occurs during the period from the second state to the first state and then to the second state.

Feature E16. Second information storage means (first result display section holding area Ra) for storing the second special information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
In a situation where special information is stored in the information storage unit and second special information is stored in the second information storage unit, control is performed so that the second determination is prioritized over the determination. Priority means (function to execute a winning process by the main controller 81),
The gaming machine according to feature E15, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first entrance part in the configuration including the provision determination process for the first entrance part and the assignment determination process for the second entrance part, Whether or not the first game time is started before the variable receiving means is set to the second state based on the remaining period of the second game time because the game time corresponding to the entry is easily performed quickly. Can be properly determined.

Feature E17. The notification control means controls the specific notification to be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state.
The grasping means includes
First grasping means (function for executing the processing of steps S2501 to S2503 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the storage status of the special information in the information storage means at the predetermined timing;
When the grasping result of the first grasping means is a specific situation, grasp the change in the storage situation that occurs until the variable receiving means changes from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. Second grasping means (function to execute the processing of steps S2505 to S2508 by the production control device 82);
With
The changing means is means for changing the execution mode of the specific notification based on the grasping results of the first grasping means and the second grasping means (execution of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E16, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific notification in advance, and it is possible to fire the game ball aiming at the variable receiving means at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, it is possible to perform specific notification not only at the execution timing of the specific notification but also taking into account the change in the storage status until the switching control is completed.

Feature E18. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 303) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance unit;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination processing for determining whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information (whether or not determination processing for the upper operating port 303 by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. A variable receiving means (electrical accessory 307) that can be switched;
Variable control means (function for executing a normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
A notification control means (a process during the support state by the effect control device 82 is executed) for controlling the specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function), and
The notification control means includes
Grasping means for grasping the storage status of the special information in the information storage means (function for executing the processes of steps S2501 to S2503 and S2504 to S2508 by the effect control device 82);
When the grasping result of the grasping means is the first situation, the specific notification is performed in the first mode (first special display effect S1), and the grasping result of the grasping means is different from the first situation. When the situation is a situation, the specific notification is performed in a second mode (second special display effect S2) different from the first mode, or the specific notification means (production for preventing the specific notification from being performed) A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of steps S2504, S2508, and S2509 by the control device 82).

  According to the said structure, the effect similar to the said characteristic E1 or E4 is anticipated. It is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the above features E2 to E16 to this feature, and in this case, “change means” in each configuration can be read as “specific notification means”. .

  In addition, the technical idea shown in each invention of each of the above-described features A to E may be applied to each invention of each of the features A to E. You may apply with respect to each invention of E group. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the inventions of the features A to E.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means (launching handle 54) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the launched game ball A ball path (rail portions 51, 52) for guiding the player to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passage part (general winning prize) of the game parts. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through the mouth 31 or the like.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  24 ... Game board, 53 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 232 ... Reserved ball storage area, 303 ... Upper working port, 305 ... Lower working port, 307 ... Electrical accessory, 311 ... First light emitting unit, 317 ... Second light emitting unit 331 ... Opening / closing member, 365 ... First guide part, 371 ... Second guide part, 403 ... Second guide part, 411 ... Notch part, 451 ... Second guide part, 453 ... Opposite part, 503 ... Second guide 511, opening / closing member, 517, through-hole, 603, first guide, R1, first flow path, R2, second flow path, R3, third flow path, RA, receiving area.

Claims (9)

Launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A pitching portion provided in the gaming area and allowing a gaming ball to enter;
A first state that is provided in the gaming area and is capable of accepting or accepting a game ball in the entrance part, and a second state that is unable to accept the game ball in the entrance part or is less likely to accept the first state. Variable receiving means that can be switched,
Variable control means for switching the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition;
With
The variable receiving means is configured to allow a game ball to flow down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state,
A gaming machine comprising a defining means capable of defining a flow direction of a game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means in the second state. A first entrance portion as the entrance portion;
A second pitching portion provided in the gaming area and different from the first pitching portion into which a gaming ball can be pitched;
With
The second incoming ball portion is disposed downstream of the variable receiving means;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the defining means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down in front of the variable receiving means to the second ball-entry portion. The variable receiving means has a movable body displaceable at a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the movable body is displaced from the second position to the first position. And is configured to be switchable from the second state to the first state,
When the movable body is located at the second position, the game ball is configured to flow down in front of the movable body,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the defining means is configured to be able to define a flow-down direction of a game ball flowing down in front of the movable body located at the second position. . The defining means protrudes forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position,
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising suppression means for suppressing a game ball flowing down the game area from coming into contact with an upper surface of the defining means from above the defining means. The movable body can be displaced to the first position by rotating forward from the second position,
The defining means includes a facing portion facing the front surface so as to be separated from the front surface of the movable body in front of the movable body located at the second position.
The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein a distance between the facing portion and the front surface of the movable body increases as it goes downward.   The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the defining means is provided on a front surface of the movable body. A game board having the game area formed on the front surface;
A deriving means for deriving a game ball protruding forward from the front surface of the game board and flowing down the game area to the front of the movable body located at the second position;
The derivation means is disposed above the defining means in a state where the movable body is located at the second position,
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein an interval between the derivation unit and the defining unit is smaller than a diameter of the game ball. The defining means extends from the rear of the movable body located at the second position to the front of the movable body,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the movable body includes an insertion portion through which the defining means can be inserted at least in the second position. Provided in the game area in the periphery of the movable body, provided with a projecting portion that projects forward from the front surface of the movable body located at the second position;
The said defining part is comprised by the said protrusion part extending to the front of the said movable body located in the said 2nd position at least in the front view from a game machine front, The thru | or the said defining means are comprised. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of 5.

Images